PYLE Audio PDAs Smartphones 7505 BTSDCMHC25 User Manual
Ikôn™ Rugged PDA  
(Windows CE 5.0)  
User Manual  
July 25, 2008  
Part No. 8100147.A  
ISO 9001 Certified  
Quality Management System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Chapter 1: Introduction  
1.1 About This Manual ...................................................................... 3  
1.2 Text Conventions ........................................................................ 4  
1.3 Ikôn Rugged PDA Features. ............................................................. 4  
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
2.1 Features Of The Ikôn Rugged PDA ...................................................... 9  
2.2 Preparing The Ikôn Rugged PDA For Operation ........................................ 11  
2.2.1 The Battery.....................................................................11  
2.3 Turning The Ikôn On And Off .......................................................... 11  
2.3.1 Installing The Battery ..........................................................11  
2.3.2 Switching The Ikôn On.........................................................11  
2.3.3 Switching The Ikôn Off ........................................................12  
2.4 Calibrating The Touchscreen............................................................13  
2.5 Configuring The Summit 802.11b/g.....................................................13  
2.5.1 Summit Client Utility (SCU) For 802.11b/g Radio..............................14  
2.5.2 Assigning The IP Address ......................................................14  
2.5.3 Name Servers Tab..............................................................16  
2.5.4 Using The SCU To Connect To The WLAN....................................17  
2.5.4.1 SSID ................................................................18  
2.5.4.2 EAP Type............................................................18  
2.5.4.3 Encryption ...........................................................18  
2.6 Checking The Scanner..................................................................19  
2.7 Data Transfer Between The PC And The Ikôn ..........................................19  
2.7.1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync ...................................................20  
2.7.2 Using Windows Vista ..........................................................20  
2.8 Voice – Using The Phone Dialer ........................................................20  
2.8.1 Dialing A Number..............................................................21  
2.8.2 Voice Menu ....................................................................22  
2.8.3 File Menu – Phonebook Management ..........................................24  
2.9 Resetting The Ikôn......................................................................26  
2.9.1 Performing A Cold Reset.......................................................27  
2.9.2 Performing A Warm Reset .....................................................27  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
3.1 The Battery .............................................................................31  
3.1.1 Battery Safety ..................................................................31  
3.1.2 Removing The Battery Pack....................................................31  
3.1.2.1 Battery Swap Time...................................................31  
3.1.3 Charging The Battery ..........................................................32  
3.1.3.1 Chargers And Docking Stations ......................................32  
3.2 The Keyboards .........................................................................33  
3.2.1 Ikôn Keyboards ................................................................33  
3.2.2 Locking The Keyboard... ......................................................34  
3.2.3 Modifier Keys..................................................................34  
3.2.3.1 Activating Modifier Keys ............................................35  
3.2.3.2 Locking Modifier Keys ..............................................35  
3.2.4 The Keys.......................................................................35  
3.2.5 The Numeric Keyboard: Accessing Alpha Keys ................................36  
3.2.6 The Keypad Backlight..........................................................38  
3.3 The Display.............................................................................38  
3.3.1 Adjusting The Display Backlight ...............................................38  
3.3.2 Calibrating The Touchscreen ...................................................38  
3.4 Ikôn Rugged PDA Indicators ...........................................................39  
3.4.1 LEDs...........................................................................40  
3.4.2 Audio Indicators ...............................................................41  
3.4.3 Onscreen Indicators ............................................................41  
3.5 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time ....................................43  
3.5.1 Storing Batteries................................................................44  
3.6 Uploading Data In A Docking Station...................................................45  
3.7 Bluetooth Radio ........................................................................45  
3.7.1 Pairing A Bluetooth Headset Or Other Bluetooth Device........................45  
3.8 Inserting The microSD And SIM Cards.................................................46  
3.8.1 Inserting The Cards ............................................................46  
3.9 General Maintenance ...................................................................47  
3.9.1 Caring For The Touchscreen ...................................................47  
3.9.2 Cleaning The Ikôn . ............................................................47  
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
4.1 Navigating In Windows CE 5.0 .. ......................................................51  
4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus...................................51  
4.1.2 Navigating Using The Keyboard ...............................................51  
ii  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4.2 Working With Files, Folders And Programs.............................................53  
4.3 The Startup Desktop ....................................................................53  
4.3.1 The Desktop Icons .............................................................54  
4.3.2 The Taskbar....................................................................55  
4.3.2.1 Using The Taskbar ...................................................56  
4.3.2.2 Customizing The Taskbar ............................................56  
4.4 The Start Menu .........................................................................58  
4.4.1 The Desktop....................................................................59  
4.4.2 Security Settings ...............................................................60  
4.4.3 Programs.......................................................................62  
4.4.4 Shortcuts .......................................................................63  
4.4.5 Settings ........................................................................65  
4.4.6 Run ............................................................................66  
4.4.7 Shutdown ......................................................................66  
4.5 Using A Dialog Box ....................................................................67  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
5.1 Remote Desktop Connection ...........................................................77  
5.2 The TekTerm Application...............................................................77  
5.3 The Control Panel ......................................................................77  
5.4 Control Panel Icons.....................................................................78  
5.5 Basic Setup .............................................................................82  
5.5.1 App Launch Keys ..............................................................82  
5.5.2 Display Properties..............................................................84  
5.5.2.1 Display Backlight ....................................................84  
5.5.2.2 Display Appearance..................................................86  
5.5.3 Keyboard Properties............................................................86  
5.5.3.1 Key Repeat ..........................................................87  
5.5.3.2 Sequence ............................................................88  
5.5.3.3 Keyboard Backlight..................................................89  
5.5.3.4 Keyboard One Shot Modes...........................................90  
5.5.3.5 Keyboard Macro Keys ...............................................91  
5.5.3.6 Unicode Mapping ....................................................93  
5.5.3.7 Scancode Remapping ................................................94  
5.5.3.8 Lock Sequence.......................................................97  
5.5.4 Volume And Sound Properties .. ...............................................98  
5.5.4.1 Volume Adjustments .................................................99  
5.5.4.2 Sound Adjustments ..................................................99  
5.5.5 Power Management Properties ................................................100  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
5.5.5.1 Battery Capacity ....................................................100  
5.5.5.2 Power Saving Suspend ..............................................101  
5.5.5.3 Suspend Threshold And Estimated Battery Backup..................102  
5.5.5.4 Advanced ...........................................................103  
5.5.5.5 Devices .............................................................104  
5.5.5.6 GPS.................................................................104  
5.5.6 Stylus Properties ..............................................................105  
5.5.6.1 Double-Tap .........................................................105  
5.5.6.2 Calibration ..........................................................105  
5.5.6.3 Touch ...............................................................106  
5.5.7 Manage Triggers ..............................................................106  
5.5.7.1 Trigger Mappings ...................................................107  
5.5.7.2 Add And Edit Trigger Mapping .....................................108  
5.5.8 Certificates ...................................................................110  
5.6 Bluetooth ..............................................................................111  
5.6.1 Bluetooth Setup ...............................................................111  
5.6.1.1 Devices .............................................................112  
5.6.1.2  
Headset.............................................................115  
5.6.1.3 Servers .............................................................116  
5.6.1.4 Outgoing ...........................................................116  
5.6.1.5 Active Conn. .......................................................117  
5.6.1.6 Properties ..........................................................118  
5.6.1.7 Search For ..........................................................119  
5.6.2 The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection .......................................119  
5.7 Total Recall... .........................................................................124  
5.7.1 Creating A Backup Profile.....................................................125  
5.7.2 Restoring A Profile............................................................129  
5.8 TweakIT...............................................................................129  
5.8.1 Advanced Interface And Network .............................................130  
5.8.2 Advanced Services Settings ...................................................131  
5.8.3 User Display Settings..........................................................132  
5.8.4 User System Settings ..........................................................132  
5.8.5 Registry Editor ................................................................133  
5.9 Error Reporting........................................................................133  
5.10 Teklogix Error Handling Service.......................................................134  
5.10.1 ErrorLogInfo ..................................................................134  
5.11 The Storage Manager ..................................................................135  
5.11.1 Formatting A Memory Card...................................................135  
5.11.2 Creating Partitions.............................................................136  
iv  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
5.11.3 Partition Management .........................................................137  
5.12 IPv6 Support...........................................................................139  
5.13 Teklogix Imagers ......................................................................140  
5.13.1 Configuring The Image Capture Presets .......................................140  
5.13.1.1 Selecting A Camera.................................................141  
5.13.1.2 Setting The Active Preset ...........................................141  
5.13.1.3 Viewing A Preset ...................................................142  
5.13.1.4 Creating A Custom Preset...........................................142  
5.13.1.5 Modifying A Custom Preset.........................................143  
5.13.1.6 Removing A Custom Preset.........................................144  
5.13.2 Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets..........................145  
5.13.2.1 Selecting A Camera.................................................146  
5.13.2.2 Setting The Active Preset ...........................................146  
5.13.2.3 Viewing A Preset ...................................................146  
5.13.2.4 Creating A Custom Preset...........................................147  
5.13.2.5 Modifying A Custom Preset.........................................148  
5.13.2.6 Removing A Custom Preset.........................................149  
5.13.3 Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Symbology Presets......................149  
5.13.3.1 Selecting A Camera.................................................150  
5.13.3.2 Setting The Active Preset ...........................................150  
5.13.3.3 Viewing A Preset ...................................................151  
5.13.3.4 Creating A Custom Preset...........................................151  
5.13.3.5 Modifying A Custom Preset.........................................152  
5.13.3.6 Removing A Custom Preset.........................................153  
5.13.3.7 Working With The My Default Preset...............................154  
5.13.4 Manipulating Bar Code Data ..................................................154  
5.13.4.1 Modifying A Bar Code Setting ......................................155  
5.13.5 Configuring Translation Rules.................................................156  
5.13.6 Obtaining Information On the Imaging System ................................157  
5.13.7 Configuring File Locations For Captured Images ..............................158  
5.13.8 Configuring Triggers ..........................................................160  
5.13.8.1 Viewing The Trigger Configuration .................................160  
5.13.8.2 Adding, Editing, And Removing Triggers ...........................161  
5.14 Scanner Settings .......................................................................161  
5.14.1 Bar Codes .....................................................................162  
5.14.1.1 Scanner .............................................................162  
5.14.1.2 Restoring Default Settings...........................................163  
5.14.2 Decoded (Internal) Scanners...................................................164  
5.14.2.1 Options .............................................................164  
5.14.2.2 Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options...............................165  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
5.14.2.3 Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options............................167  
5.14.2.4 Decoded (Internal) Data Options ....................................167  
5.14.2.5 Code 39.............................................................168  
5.14.2.6 Code 128............................................................171  
5.14.2.7 EAN 13.............................................................171  
5.14.2.8 EAN 8 ..............................................................172  
5.14.2.9 UPC A..............................................................172  
5.14.2.10 UPC E ..............................................................173  
5.14.2.11 UPC/EAN Shared Settings ..........................................174  
5.14.2.12 Code 93.............................................................175  
5.14.2.13 Codabar.............................................................175  
5.14.2.14 MSI Plessey.........................................................176  
5.14.2.15 Interleaved 2 of 5 ...................................................177  
5.14.2.16 Discrete 2 of 5 ......................................................178  
5.14.2.17 RSS Code...........................................................178  
5.14.2.18 Composite ..........................................................179  
5.14.2.19 PDF-417 ............................................................179  
5.14.2.20 Micro PDF-417 .....................................................180  
5.14.3 Decoded (ISCP)...............................................................181  
5.14.3.1 Decoded (ISCP) Options ............................................181  
5.14.3.2 Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options .................................181  
5.14.3.3 Code 39.............................................................182  
5.14.3.4 Code 128............................................................183  
5.14.3.5 EAN 13 Settings ....................................................185  
5.14.3.6 EAN 8 ..............................................................185  
5.14.3.7 UPC A Settings .....................................................186  
5.14.3.8 UPC E Settings .....................................................186  
5.14.3.9 UPC/EAN Shared Settings ..........................................187  
5.14.3.10 Code 93.............................................................188  
5.14.3.11 Codabar.............................................................188  
5.14.3.12 MSI Plessey.........................................................189  
5.14.3.13 Code 11.............................................................190  
5.14.3.14 Interleaved 2 of 5 ...................................................190  
5.14.3.15 Matrix 2 of 5........................................................191  
5.14.3.16 Discrete 2 of 5 ......................................................191  
5.14.3.17 Telepen .............................................................192  
5.14.3.18 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)... ..........................193  
5.14.3.19 PDF-417 ............................................................193  
5.14.3.20 Micro PDF-417 .....................................................193  
5.14.3.21 Codablock ..........................................................194  
5.14.4 Imager ........................................................................195  
5.14.4.1 Imager Options .....................................................195  
vi  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
5.14.4.2 Imager Advanced Options...........................................196  
5.14.4.3 Code 39 Settings ....................................................199  
5.14.4.4 Code 128 Settings...................................................199  
5.14.4.5 EAN 13.............................................................199  
5.14.4.6 EAN 8 ..............................................................200  
5.14.4.7 UPC A..............................................................200  
5.14.4.8 UPC E ..............................................................200  
5.14.4.9 Code 93.............................................................200  
5.14.4.10 Codabar.............................................................201  
5.14.4.11 Interleaved 2 of 5 ...................................................201  
5.14.4.12 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)... ..........................201  
5.14.4.13 Composite ..........................................................201  
5.14.4.14 PDF-417 ............................................................201  
5.14.4.15 Micro PDF-417 .....................................................202  
5.14.4.16 2D Data Matrix .....................................................202  
5.14.4.17 2D QR Code ........................................................202  
5.14.4.18 2D Maxicode .......................................................202  
5.14.4.19 2D Aztec............................................................202  
5.14.4.20 Postal: PlaNET......................................................203  
5.14.4.21 Postal: PostNET.....................................................203  
5.14.4.22 Postal: Australian ...................................................203  
5.14.4.23 Postal: Japanese.....................................................203  
5.14.4.24 Postal: Korean ......................................................203  
5.14.4.25 Postal: Royal........................................................204  
5.14.5 Options........................................................................204  
5.14.5.1 Double Click Parameters............................................204  
5.14.5.2 Display Parameters..................................................205  
5.14.6 Translations ..................................................................206  
5.14.6.1 Case Rules ..........................................................207  
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
6.1 Carrying Accessories ..................................................................211  
6.1.1 Attaching The Handstrap With Tether (Model No. CH6021)...................211  
6.1.2 Attaching The Tether (Model No. CH6020) ...................................216  
6.1.3 Protective Carrying Cases .....................................................219  
6.2 The Battery ............................................................................219  
6.3 Adaptor Cable Options ................................................................219  
6.4 Chargers And Docking Stations: General Information..................................219  
6.4.1 Important Safety Instructions ..................................................220  
6.4.2 Installation: Chargers And Docking Stations...................................221  
6.4.3 Power Consumption Considerations ...........................................221  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
6.5 CH4000 Desktop Docking Station .....................................................222  
6.5.1 Operator Controls .............................................................223  
6.5.2 Indicators .....................................................................223  
6.5.3 Operation .....................................................................223  
6.5.3.1 Charging The Ikôn Battery ..........................................223  
6.5.3.2 Charging The Spare Battery.........................................224  
6.5.3.3 Operating The USB Dock...........................................224  
6.5.4 Cleaning The CH4000.........................................................225  
6.5.5 Troubleshooting...............................................................226  
6.5.5.1 Docking Station Does Not Seem To Power On.......................226  
6.5.5.2 The Ikôn Charge Indicator LED Stays Off. ..........................226  
6.5.5.3 The Ikôn Charge Indicator LED Is Fast Flashing Green..............226  
6.5.5.4 Spare Battery LED Fast Flashes Green With A Battery Installed. ....226  
6.5.5.5 Spare Battery LED Does Not Turn On When A Battery Is Installed..226  
6.6 CH4004 Quad Docking Station ... .....................................................227  
6.6.1 Operator Controls .............................................................227  
6.6.2 Indicators .....................................................................227  
6.6.3 Operation .....................................................................228  
6.6.3.1 Charging The Ikôn Battery ..........................................228  
6.6.3.2 Connecting To The Ethernet Network ...............................228  
6.6.4 Cleaning The CH4004.........................................................229  
6.6.5 Troubleshooting...............................................................230  
6.6.5.1 The Ikôn Charge Indicator LED Stays Off. ..........................230  
6.6.5.2 The Ikôn Charge Indicator LED Is Fast Flashing Green..............230  
6.6.5.3 Green LED OFF When Connected To A Network. ..................230  
6.6.5.4 Yellow LED OFF When Connected To A 100Base-T Network. .....230  
6.6.5.5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off. ...................................230  
6.7 AC Wall Adaptor: Model No. PS1050 - G1 ............................................230  
6.8 Automotive Power Adaptor: Model No. CH3050 ......................................231  
6.9 The CH1000 Non-Powered Vehicle Cradle ............................................232  
6.9.1 Important Instructions .........................................................233  
6.9.2 Vehicle Cradle Operation......................................................233  
6.9.2.1 Operator Controls ...................................................233  
6.9.2.2 Indicators ...........................................................233  
6.9.2.3 Placing The Ikôn In The Vehicle Cradle .............................233  
6.9.2.4 Removing The Ikôn From The Vehicle Cradle.......................234  
6.9.3 CH1000 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations .........................234  
6.9.3.1 Mounting Template .................................................234  
6.9.4 Cleaning The CH1000 Vehicle Cradle.. .......................................235  
6.10 The CH1005A Powered Vehicle Cradle.. ..............................................236  
viii  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
6.10.1 CH1005A Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations .......................238  
6.10.1.1 Mounting Template .................................................239  
6.10.2 Cable Arrangement............................................................239  
6.10.3 Electrical Requirements .......................................................239  
6.10.3.1 Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle................................240  
6.10.4 USB And Serial Connections..................................................241  
6.10.5 Using The Vehicle Cradle .....................................................242  
6.10.6 Maintaining The Vehicle Cradle...............................................242  
6.11 Scanners And Imagers .................................................................242  
6.11.1 Scanning Techniques..........................................................243  
6.11.2 Troubleshooting...............................................................243  
6.11.3 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Laser Scanners..............................244  
6.11.4 Operating Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers ....................................244  
6.12 Bluetooth Peripherals ..................................................................245  
Chapter 7: Specifications  
7.1 Ikôn Rugged PDA Specifications (Model No. 7505) .. .................................249  
7.1.1 Hardware......................................................................249  
7.1.2 Software ......................................................................251  
7.1.3 Wireless Communication......................................................251  
7.1.4 Bar Code Applications (optional)..............................................252  
7.1.5 Camera (optional) .............................................................252  
7.1.6 Accessories . ..................................................................252  
7.1.7 Approvals .....................................................................253  
7.2 Radio Specifications ...................................................................253  
7.2.1 802.11b/g WLAN Radio ......................................................253  
7.2.2 Siemens MC75 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio ....................................254  
7.2.3 Siemens HC25 UMTS Modem ................................................255  
7.2.4 Bluetooth Radio ...............................................................258  
7.3 Lithium-Ion Battery 5000 mAh Specifications .........................................258  
7.4 Scanner/Imager Specifications .........................................................259  
7.4.1 SE 955HP Specifications ......................................................259  
7.4.1.1 SE 955HP Decode Zone ............................................260  
7.4.2 EV15 Imager Specifications...................................................260  
7.4.2.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone .........................................261  
7.4.3 SX5400* Imager Specifications . ..............................................262  
7.4.3.1 SX5400 Imager Performance. .......................................263  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Appendix A: Port Pinouts  
A.1 Docking Port Pinout . ................................................................. A-1  
A.2 Audio Port Pinout..................................................................... A-2  
A.3 DC IN Port Pinout .................................................................... A-3  
A.4 Battery 5000 mAh (CH3000): Contact Pinout... ...................................... A-3  
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
B.1 Wireless WAN.........................................................................B-3  
B.1.1 Taskbar Icons .................................................................B-3  
B.1.2 Establishing A Connection ....................................................B-4  
B.1.3 Advanced Information.........................................................B-6  
B.1.4 Tools Menu ...................................................................B-8  
B.1.5 SMS Menu.................................................................. B-17  
B.1.6 Voice........................................................................ B-18  
B.2 Power Mode......................................................................... B-19  
Appendix C: SCU For 802.11b/g Radio  
C.1 SCU Tabs..............................................................................C-3  
C.1.1 Main Tab......................................................................C-3  
C.1.2 Profile Tab ....................................................................C-4  
C.1.3 Status Tab.....................................................................C-9  
C.1.4 Diags Tab .....................................................................C-9  
C.1.5 Global Tab ................................................................. C-10  
x
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTRODUCTION  
1
1.1 About This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
1.2 Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
1.3 Ikôn Rugged PDA Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1: Introduction  
About This Manual  
1.1  
About This Manual  
This manual describes how to configure, operate and maintain the Psion Teklogix Ikôn  
Rugged PDA.  
Chapter 1: Introduction  
provides a basic overview of Ikôn.  
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
describes the steps required to get the Ikôn ready for operation, including setting  
up your 802.11b/g radio.  
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
describes Ikôn features and outlines how to charge and maintain the battery.  
This chapter also provides a description of the keyboard, how to navigate in  
®
®
Microsoft Windows CE 5.0, and so on.  
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
describes the Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 desktop and how to use it. This  
chapter also outlines the basics of moving around a Microsoft Windows CE 5.0  
window, selecting and opening icons, files, folders and working with a Windows  
dialog box.  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
describes the Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Control Panel and how to use it to  
configure the Ikôn, along with attached scanners, and so on.  
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
describes the peripherals and accessories available for your Ikôn.  
Chapter 7: Specifications  
lists Ikôn, radio, scanner, and battery specifications.  
Appendix A: Port Pinouts  
describes Ikôn pinouts.  
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
describes WWAN configuration information (GPRS radio Model No. RA3030).  
Appendix C: SCU For 802.11b/g Radio  
provides detailed descriptions of the Summit Client Utility menus.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1: Introduction  
Text Conventions  
1.2  
Text Conventions  
Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information.  
Important: These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional  
information that is critical to the operation of the equipment.  
Warning: These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical  
injury, equipment damage or data loss.  
1.3  
Ikôn Rugged PDA Features  
Important: For all safety, regulatory and warranty information, refer to the Ikôn  
Rugged PDA Regulatory & Warranty Guide, PN 8000148.  
Ikôn is a ruggedized PDA running the Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 operating system. It is in-  
tended for use in commercial and light industrial applications with a focus on real time  
wireless data transactions. All possible bar code input methodologies are supported by one  
of a variety of scanners available. Optimization for specific operational environments is sup-  
ported with a wide range of peripheral options and carrying accessories.  
Note: For complete Ikôn Rugged PDA specifications, refer to “Specifications” on  
page 247.  
4
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1: Introduction  
Ikôn Rugged PDA Features  
Figure 1.1 Ikôn Rugged PDA  
Platform  
•
•
XScale PXA270 @ 624 MHz, 32 bit RISC CPU.  
128 MB flash, 128 MB RAM.  
Operating System  
Microsoft Windows CE 5.0.  
Multi-Media Chipset  
NVIDIAGoForce 4000 Multi-Media Processor.  
User Interface  
Colour Touch Screen Display 9.39 cm (3.7 in.) diagonal.  
•
•
•
- Full VGA 480x640 resolution.  
- Transflective, portrait mode TFT.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1: Introduction  
Ikôn Rugged PDA Features  
- Adjustable Backlight.  
•
•
Touchscreen.  
- Passive stylus or finger operation.  
- Signature capture.  
Keyboards.  
- Full Aphanumeric  
- Numeric, with or without Phone option.  
- Ergonomically enhanced for ambidextrous, one-hand operation.  
- Backlit, high durability hard-capped keys.  
Wireless Communication  
Optional expansion modules for:  
•
802.11b/g (proprietary module) operating in the 2.4GHz band.  
- Supports IEEE 802.11b data rates of 1, 2, 5.5, and 11 Mbps using Direct Sequence  
Spread Spectrum (DSSS).  
- Supports IEEE 802.11g data rates of 6, 9, 12, 24, 36, 48, and 54 Mbps, using Orthag-  
onal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) base band modulation.  
•
GSM/GPRS EDGE (via expansion interface).  
- Quad-Band – 850/900/1800/1900.  
- Voice and Data.  
- GPRS Class B, Multi-Slot Class 12.  
- EGPRS Class B, Multi-Slot Class 12.  
®
Integrated Bluetooth class 2, ver 2.0  
•
•
Supports Enhanced Data Rate (EDR) for up to 3 Mbps data rate.  
Supports Advanced Frequency Hopping (AFH) for reduced interference with  
802.11b/g radio.  
Note: 802.11b/g, GSM, and Bluetooth are available simultaneously.  
6
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC CHECKOUT  
2
2.1 Features Of The Ikôn Rugged PDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
2.2 Preparing The Ikôn Rugged PDA For Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
2.2.1 The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
2.3 Turning The Ikôn On And Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
2.3.1 Installing The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
2.3.2 Switching The Ikôn On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
2.3.3 Switching The Ikôn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
2.4 Calibrating The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
2.5 Configuring The Summit 802.11b/g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
2.5.1 Summit Client Utility (SCU) For 802.11b/g Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
2.5.2 Assigning The IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
2.5.3 Name Servers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
2.5.4 Using The SCU To Connect To The WLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
2.5.4.1 SSID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
2.5.4.2 EAP Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
2.5.4.3 Encryption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
2.6 Checking The Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
2.7 Data Transfer Between The PC And The Ikôn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
2.7.1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
2.7.2 Using Windows Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
2.8 Voice – Using The Phone Dialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
2.8.1 Dialing A Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
2.8.2 Voice Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
2.8.3 File Menu – Phonebook Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
2.9 Resetting The Ikôn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
2.9.1 Performing A Cold Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
2.9.2 Performing A Warm Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Features Of The Ikôn Rugged PDA  
2.1  
Features Of The Ikôn Rugged PDA  
Figure 2.1 Front, Top, And Sides Of The Ikôn  
3 LEDs  
Receiver  
Power Button  
(Light Emitting Diodes)  
RIGHT SIDE  
Enter Button  
Up/Down Arrow Button  
LEFT SIDE  
Microphone Port  
Audio Port  
Scan Button  
Up/Down Volume Button  
FRONT  
TOP  
Scanner/Imager  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
 
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Features Of The Ikôn Rugged PDA  
Figure 2.2 Back Of The Ikôn  
Speaker  
Camera  
Hand Strap Anchor  
Battery Latch  
Battery Latch  
Cover for Battery and  
SIM/microSD Card  
Compartments  
Stylus  
Figure 2.3 Bottom Of The Ikôn (Ports)  
Docking Port/USB on-the-go  
DC IN Port  
Hand Strap Anchor  
10  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Preparing The Ikôn Rugged PDA For Operation  
2.2  
Preparing The Ikôn Rugged PDA For Operation  
2.2.1  
The Battery  
The Ikôn is powered with a Lithium Ion battery pack, 5000 mAh—Model No. CH3000.  
Warning: Before charging the battery, it is critical that you review the battery safety  
guidelines in the Ikôn Rugged PDA Regulatory & Warranty Guide Regula-  
tory & Warranty Guide, PN 8000148.  
Battery packs shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% and must be fully  
charged prior to use. Batteries can be charged using a variety of chargers and docking sta-  
tions along with an Ikôn internal charger. When using the internal charger, a suitable power  
source is required. The battery, and all chargers and docking stations are described in  
Chapter 6: “Peripheral Devices & Accessories” beginning on page 219.  
2.3  
Turning The Ikôn On And Off  
2.3.1  
Installing The Battery  
Important: Press the Power button to turn off the PDA before opening the battery  
cover on your Ikôn (see “Switching The Ikôn Off” on page 12).  
•
To unlock the battery cover, turn the left-hand battery fastener to the left, and turn the  
right-hand battery fastener to the right.  
•
•
Remove the battery cover.  
Snap the charged battery into the unit. Replace the battery cover, and lock the fasteners  
in place.  
Note: If you are using a docking station or an external power supply, you can insert an  
uncharged battery and switch it on.  
2.3.2  
Switching The Ikôn On  
•
Press and hold down the Power button, located on the front of the unit at the top right,  
for at least one second.  
•
When the yellow LED flashes, release the Power button.  
The desktop screen is displayed.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
             
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Switching The Ikôn Off  
Note: If the unit was already in use—the unit may be off (suspend state)—pressing  
[ENTER] ‘wakes’ the unit from this state. The screen in which you were working  
prior to the suspend state is displayed. “GPS” on page 104 describes how you can  
assign other ‘wakeup’ keys or enable a two-key ‘power on’ sequence.  
Important: If your Ikôn fails to power up, consider the following troubleshooting  
options:  
The battery capacity may be too low (capacity < 100mAh), it may be over-  
heated (>60C°), a non-Psion Teklogix battery may be installed, or the  
battery may have fallen below the configured Suspend Threshold. See  
“Suspend Threshold And Estimated Battery Backup” on page 102  
for details.  
If you provide AC power to an Ikôn, and either the battery capacity is too  
low or the battery is overheated, a yellow LED will flash and the unit will  
not switch on. To switch on the PDA, you will need to replace the over-  
heated battery or, in the case of a depleted battery, wait for the capacity to  
reach an acceptable level.  
However, if you supply AC power to an Ikôn with a battery that falls below  
the configured Suspend Threshold, the PDA will switch on.  
2.3.3  
Switching The Ikôn Off  
Important: Keep in mind that turning off the Ikôn does not result in a complete reboot;  
rather, the unit enters a power-saving, “suspend” state. When the unit is  
turned on from suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds.  
•
To switch off the Ikôn, press and hold the Power button for five seconds. The Shutdown  
dialog box (Figure 2.4 on page 13) will appear for you to choose whether you want to  
Shutdown or Suspend.  
12  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Calibrating The Touchscreen  
Figure 2.4 Shutdown Dialog Box  
The Suspend option will simply suspend the device. Radios such as the GPRS or UMTS can  
still operate while the device is suspended. In this case the blue LED radio indicator will  
continue blinking.  
The Shutdown option will turn off all radios before suspending the device. When this hap-  
pens, the blue LED radio indicator will stop blinking since all radios are turned off.  
2.4  
2.5  
Calibrating The Touchscreen  
Note: Keep in mind that the touchscreen function can be turned off (see “Touch” on  
page 106).  
The Ikôn touchscreen is factory-calibrated and ready-to-go; however, over time the touch-  
screen operating parameters may change, and it may need to be recalibrated for correct  
operation. Refer to “Calibrating The Touchscreen” on page 38 for details.  
Configuring The Summit 802.11b/g  
Psion Teklogix supports an 802.11b/g Compact Flash (CF) wireless LAN radio card. It is a  
Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum radio.  
If your unit is equipped with an 802.11b/g CF radio, follow the steps below to set up this  
type of radio for communication with a wireless LAN. For detailed information, see “SCU  
For 802.11b/g Radio” on page C-1.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Summit Client Utility (SCU) For 802.11b/g Radio  
2.5.1  
Summit Client Utility (SCU) For 802.11b/g Radio  
This section describes the Summit Client Utility (SCU). The SCU provides the utilities you  
will need to configure the Summit 802.11b/g Compact Flash radio module so that it can  
communicate through a wireless LAN effectively and securely.  
2.5.2  
Assigning The IP Address  
Before launching the SCU, you need to configure how the IP address will be obtained. If  
your network is not using a DHCP server, you will need to assign an IP address.  
1. Tap on Start>Settings>Network and Dial-up Connections.  
If you’re using the keyboard, press [ORANGE] [#] to display the Start Menu. Use the  
[DOWN] arrow key to highlight Settings. Press the [RIGHT] arrow key to display the  
sub-menu. Highlight Network, and press [ENTER].  
2. Choose the Summit WLAN Adapter icon to open the 802.11b/g Wireless LAN Set-  
tings window. In the figure below, this icon is labelled SDCCF10G1.  
Figure 2.5 Summit WLAN Adaptor Icon  
The Summit WLAN Adapter Settings menu is displayed (In this screen shown as the  
SDCCF10G1 menu).  
14  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Assigning The IP Address  
3. Tap on the IP Information tab.  
Note: Choosing the Renew button forces the Ikôn to renew or find a new IP address. This  
is useful if, for example, you are out of communication range for a longer period of  
time and your Ikôn is dropped from the network.  
4. To define a static IP address, tap on the Configure button. The Summit WLAN  
Adapter Settings menu provides two options:  
• Tap on Obtain an IP address via DHCP to have an address assigned  
automatically, or  
• If you want to use a particular IP address, tap on Specify an IP address, and type the  
preferred address as well as the IP, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway addresses in  
the appropriate fields. Tap OK to save your information.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Name Servers Tab  
2.5.3  
Name Servers Tab  
Note: If DHCP is enabled, name server addresses are assigned automatically.  
•
In the SDCCF10G1 window, display the IP Information tab.  
•
In the Summit WLAN Adapter Settings>IP Information tab, tap on the  
Configure button.  
•
Display the Name Servers tab.  
16  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Using The SCU To Connect To The WLAN  
The DNS and WINS fields in the Name Servers tab allow you to specify additional WINS  
and DNS resolvers. The format for these fields is ###.###.###.###.  
2.5.4  
Using The SCU To Connect To The WLAN  
This section provides a quick set of steps to create a profile. Detailed information about each  
of the SCU tabs—Main, Profile, Status, Diags and Global—is provided in Appendix C:  
“SCU For 802.11b/g Radio”. To launch the SCU so that your Ikôn can connect to a wireless  
LAN:  
•
Tap on Start>Programs>Summit, and then tap on the SCU icon.  
Figure 2.6 SCU Main Tab  
•
Tap on the Profile tab.  
•
Tap on the New button to define a new profile.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
   
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
SSID  
•
•
•
•
Type a name using any alpha-numeric combination to uniquely identify this profile.  
Tap on OK to return to the Profile tab.  
Tap on Commit to save the profile name.  
When a pop-up message indicates that your profile will be saved, tap on OK.  
2.5.4.1 SSID  
To configure the SSID for the network to which you want to associate:  
•
•
Type an SSID in the text box to the right of SSID. This field is limited to 32 characters.  
Tap on Commit and then, in the pop-up message, tap on OK to save your SSID setting.  
Important: To learn more about the other options available in the radio attributes list,  
refer to page C-5 of Appendix C: SCU For 802.11b/g Radio.  
2.5.4.2 EAP Type  
•
Tap on the EAP type drop-down menu, and choose the appropriate type of authentica-  
tion—LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP-MSCHAP, and PEAP-GTC.  
•
Next, tap on the Credentials button, and type credentials for IEEE 802.1X EAP types.  
Important: Refer to page C-6 of Appendix C: SCU For 802.11b/g Radio for details  
about security settings. Additional EAP details are described in “EAP Cre-  
dentials” on page C-7.  
2.5.4.3 Encryption  
•
Tap on the Encryption drop-down menu, and choose the appropriate type of encryp-  
tion—Manual WEP, Auto WEP, WPA PSK, WPA TKIP, WAP2 PSK, WAP2 AES, CCKM  
TKIP, CKIP Manual, or CKIP Auto.  
If you choose Manual WEP, WPA PSK, or WPA PSK:  
•
•
•
Tap on the WEP/PSK Keys button. For Manual WEP, choose up to four static WEP  
keys. For PSK, type an ASCII passphrase or hex PSK.  
Configure any other settings that are supplied by the network administrator for the SSID  
to which you will associate.  
Make certain that you tap on Commit following each change.  
Once you’ve completed the configuration:  
•
Tap the Main tab. Tap on the Active Profile button—your new profile will be listed in  
the drop-down menu.  
18  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Checking The Scanner  
When you tap on the profile you created, the 802.11b/g radio module attempts to connect to  
the network using the following steps:  
- Associate to the SSID.  
- Authenticate to the network.  
- If EAP authentication is being used, derive dynamic encryption keys.  
- If DHCP is being used by the network, obtain an IP address.  
If the radio is not connecting properly:  
•
Tap on the Status tab.  
The Status dialog box lists the IP and MAC addresses, and indicates the current state of the  
radio, the signal strength, channel and so on.  
You can go to the Diags tab for DHCP renewal, ICMP Echo Requests (Pings), and  
diagnostics.  
Important: For details about the Status dialog box, refer to page C-1 of Appendix C:  
SCU For 802.11b/g Radio.  
2.6  
2.7  
Checking The Scanner  
If your Ikôn is equipped with an internal scanner, you can test it to ensure that it is operating  
properly. Point the scanner window at a bar code that your scanner was designed to de-  
code—for example, a 1D UPC bar code or 2D bar code. Press the SCAN key or pistol  
trigger, and check for a valid decode on the Ikôn screen.  
Performance is improved if you disable all unneeded bar codes in the Bar Codes screen.  
Review “Scanner Settings” on page 161 or details about bar codes.  
Data Transfer Between The PC And The Ikôn  
Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in  
your PC.  
®
®
For Windows XP SP2 operating systems or earlier, Microsoft ActiveSync is PC connec-  
tivity software that can be used to connect your Ikôn to PCs running this software.  
®
If the Windows Vista operating system is installed in your PC, ActiveSync is not required  
to transfer data between your Ikôn and your PC.  
By connecting the Ikôn to a PC with a cable, you can:  
•
View Ikôn files from Windows Explorer.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
           
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Using Microsoft ActiveSync  
•
•
Drag and drop files between the Ikôn and the PC in the same way that you would  
between PC drives.  
Back up Ikôn files to the PC, then restore them from the PC to the PDA again, if needed,  
and so on.  
2.7.1  
2.7.2  
Using Microsoft ActiveSync  
To install ActiveSync, follow the step-by-step instructions provided with the program’s  
setup wizard. Refer to the following website for details:  
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/activesync/activesync45.mspx  
Using Windows Vista  
If you have Windows Vista, your Ikôn data transfers do not require ActiveSync. To transfer  
data between your PC and your Ikôn:  
•
•
Tap on Start>Computer to display the drives. Your Ikôn will be visible here.  
Open drives, files and folders as you would on your PC.  
2.8  
Voice – Using The Phone Dialer  
Note: The Phone option is only offered in countries with GPRS availability.  
If the WWAN modem is installed and enabled, the Phone icon and the GSM signal strength  
icon will appear automatically on the taskbar.  
•
Double click on the Phone icon to access the voice dialer.  
You can also follow the steps below to access the phone dialer:  
•
•
To access the dialer, tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel.  
Tap on the Wireless WAN icon, and then tap on the Voice tab.  
20  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Dialing A Number  
The Voice tab displays a phone dialer used to dial phone numbers. The Voice menu provides  
commands which allow you to manage your phone contacts, view your phone history, and  
so on.  
Phone Number Entry Field  
Send Button  
Backspace Button  
End Button  
Universal  
Mute Button  
International  
Dialing Prefix  
2.8.1  
Dialing A Number  
To make a phone call, all you need is the recipient’s phone number.  
•
Type the recipient’s phone number in the phone number entry field.  
- Send button – tap to dial the number you typed.  
- Backspace button – tap to erase characters in the phone number entry field.  
- End button – tap to disconnect the phone call.  
- Mute button – During a phone call, tap to mute sound transmission. Tap again to  
restore sound.  
- + button – When making an international call, the + sign can be used as a universal  
substitute for any international dialing prefix and is guaranteed to work worldwide.  
The entry sequence must be as follows: + country code followed by phone number.  
Example: A standard phone number: 011 36 30 275 28466  
using the + substitution is typed as follows: +36 30 275 28466  
The + symbol replaces the universal dialing prefix 011.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Voice Menu  
2.8.2  
Voice Menu  
This menu allows you to manage calls, view your call history, and if required, assign a call  
forwarding service to your Ikôn.  
Call Lists  
The Call List command manages your call history, listing calls you’ve Dialed, Received and  
Missed. When you choose one of these commands, a dialog box lists the phone number(s).  
A drop-down menu provides a list of commands you can execute on a phone number in the  
Call List. You can choose to:  
- Dial the number,  
- Send a New SMS, or  
22  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Voice Menu  
- Add to phonebook to add the highlighted phone number to your phonebook. (Refer  
to “Phonebook” on page 25 for additional details.)  
In the Call List, highlight the phone number with which you want to work.  
•
•
Choose a command in the drop-down menu.  
Tap on the Execute button to carry out the command.  
Services  
The Service menu offers a Call Forwarding option for your Ikôn. If you choose this option,  
it may take a number of seconds for your unit to read the network settings.  
To forward all calls:  
•
Tap in the checkbox next to Forward all calls, and then type the phone number to  
which all incoming phone calls will be routed.  
To specify when a call will be forwarded, that is:  
- Forward the call only when it is not answered after a specified number of seconds,  
- Forward the call when you have identified yourself as ‘unavailable’, or  
- Forward the call when your unit is busy:  
•
Tap in the appropriate checkbox, and enter the phone number to which the call will  
be routed.  
Call Management  
The Call Management option only becomes available in the Voice menu when at least one  
phone call is either On hold or Active. When you choose this command, the currently active  
phone call(s) is listed in a dialog box.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
File Menu – Phonebook Management  
Using the drop-down menu, you can choose to:  
- Hang Up All Calls - This option only appears when more than one call is listed.  
- Hang Up - This option disconnects only the call you’ve highlighted in the list.  
- Hold - This option places the call you’ve highlighted on hold.  
- Retrieve - This option is only available when a call is on hold, and choosing it  
retrieves the call you have highlighted from hold.  
•
•
In the Call Management list, highlight the phone number to which you’d like to apply  
a command.  
Choose a command from the drop-down menu, and tap on Execute to carry out the  
command on the highlighted phone number.  
If you have two active calls on your Ikôn, one On Hold and one Active, you can set up a con-  
ference call between yourself and the other callers. To set up a conference call:  
•
Highlight the phone number that is currently On Hold, and choose Retrieve. Tap  
on Execute.  
Both calls will be listed as Active in the Call Management list. All calls are now conferenced  
so that you, as well as your callers, can speak to one another.  
2.8.3  
File Menu – Phonebook Management  
Tapping on the File menu provides access to your Phonebook.  
24  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
File Menu – Phonebook Management  
Phonebook  
The Phonebook allows you to store frequently used phone numbers. When no numbers have  
been added to your phonebook, the only command available to you is New Entry.  
To add a new phone number to your phonebook:  
•
Choose New Entry in the drop-down menu, and tap on Execute.  
•
•
•
Type the name corresponding to the phone number you want to add.  
Press Tab and type the phone number you want to store.  
Tap in the checkbox next to Store in SIM to save the phone number there, or leave this  
checkbox blank if you prefer not to store the number on the SIM card.  
•
Tap on the Execute button to save the phone number in your Phonebook.  
Phonebook entries are saved even after you exit Wireless WAN.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
 
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Resetting The Ikôn  
Once you’ve added a phone number to the Phonebook, a list of new commands is available  
in the drop-down menu.  
You can choose one of the following:  
- New Entry - to add another phone number,  
- New SMS (Short Message Service) - to send a new SMS,  
- Edit Entry - to change an existing name and/or phone number, or  
- Delete Entry - to erase an existing phone entry.  
•
•
In the Phonebook, highlight the entry with which you want to work.  
Choose a command from the drop-down menu, and tap on Execute to carry out  
the command.  
2.9  
Resetting The Ikôn  
The Ikôn hardware can be reset in a number of ways, resulting in a cold reset or a  
warm reset.  
During a cold reset:  
•
•
•
Running programs are halted, and any unsaved data in them is lost.  
The hardware is reset.  
The contents of flash memory, including the registry, custom settings and user-added  
programs, are retained.  
•
•
The OS is reloaded from saved settings.  
The contents of RAM are lost, and the RAM disk is reinitialized to its default.  
26  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout  
Performing A Cold Reset  
During a warm reset:  
•
•
Running programs are halted, and any unsaved data in them is lost.  
The contents of flash memory, including the registry, custom settings and user-added  
programs, are retained.  
•
•
The OS is reloaded from saved settings.  
The contents of RAM are preserved.  
You can perform a warm or cold reset by choosing those options in the Shutdown menu, or  
follow the directions below.  
2.9.1  
Performing A Cold Reset  
Important: A cold reset returns the Ikôn to factory settings.  
To execute a cold reset:  
•
Press and hold down the [ENTER] key and the Power button simultaneously for a  
minimum of four seconds.  
You will need to press the Power button to turn the Ikôn back on.  
2.9.2  
Performing A Warm Reset  
To execute a warm reset:  
•
Press and hold down the [BLUE] key and the [ENTER] key simultaneously for a  
minimum of four seconds.  
A warm reset closes open applications; any unsaved data are lost. Installed programs and  
saved data are preserved. The Ikôn automatically reboots.  
Note: You do not need to reset your Ikôn after configuring the radio.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR IKÔN  
3
3.1 The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
3.1.1 Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
3.1.2 Removing The Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
3.1.2.1 Battery Swap Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
3.1.3 Charging The Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
3.1.3.1 Chargers And Docking Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
3.2 The Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
3.2.1 Ikôn Keyboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
3.2.2 Locking The Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
3.2.3 Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
3.2.3.1 Activating Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
3.2.3.2 Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
3.2.4 The Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
3.2.5 The Numeric Keyboard: Accessing Alpha Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
3.2.6 The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
3.3 The Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
3.3.1 Adjusting The Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
3.3.2 Calibrating The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
3.4 Ikôn Rugged PDA Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
3.4.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
3.4.2 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
3.4.3 Onscreen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
3.5 Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
3.5.1 Storing Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
3.6 Uploading Data In A Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
3.7 Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
3.7.1 Pairing A Bluetooth Headset Or Other Bluetooth Device . . . . . . . . . . 45  
3.8 Inserting The microSD And SIM Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
3.8.1 Inserting The Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3.9 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
3.9.1 Caring For The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
3.9.2 Cleaning The Ikôn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
30  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
The Battery  
3.1  
The Battery  
The Ikôn operates with a Lithium Ion battery pack, Model No. CH3000. Preparing the unit  
for operation requires that a battery pack be charged and installed in the Ikôn.  
3.1.1  
Battery Safety  
Important: Before attempting to install, use or charge the battery pack, it is critical that  
you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the quick reference  
guide entitled Ikôn Rugged PDA Regulatory & Warranty Guide Regulatory  
& Warranty Guide, PN 8000148.  
3.1.2  
Removing The Battery Pack  
Important: Always switch the unit off before opening the battery cover to remove  
the battery.  
Refer to “Installing The Battery” on page 11.  
3.1.2.1 Battery Swap Time  
Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been al-  
tered, battery swap time is a minimum of 10 minutes—you will not lose data if the battery is  
replaced within this time frame.  
To protect data, the safest place to store data is on a microSD memory card or externally to  
the device on a USB memory stick or on a PC. You can also save data in the “Flash Disk”  
partition of the file system.  
The Suspend Threshold adjustment in the Power Properties tab allows you to determine the  
battery capacity at which the Ikôn will be shut down. If left at the default value, Maximum  
Operating Time, the unit will run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only  
backed up for a short period of time. If you choose Maximum Backup Time, the Ikôn shuts  
off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period  
of time.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
Charging The Battery  
Important: Since there are some circuits that draw power directly from the battery, the  
Ikôn can not run if the battery is low (capacity < 100mAh), even when  
external power is present. If you try to turn the Ikôn on, you will see a  
blinking yellow LED, but it will not turn on unless the battery status  
changes within the next 30 seconds (battery charges up, battery is swapped  
for a different one, etc.).  
You will also get this blinking yellow LED and a refusal to wake up if the  
battery is too hot (>60C°).  
Refer to “Suspend Threshold And Estimated Battery Backup” on page 102 for details about  
reserving battery power for data backup purposes.  
3.1.3  
Charging The Battery  
Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity. They must  
be fully charged prior to use.  
3.1.3.1 Chargers And Docking Stations  
Important: FOR DETAILED INFORMATION about chargers and docking stations,  
refer to Appendix 6: “Peripheral Devices & Accessories”.  
Lithium Ion battery packs must be charged before use. These batteries can be charged with a  
variety of chargers and docking stations. These include:  
•
AC wall adaptor (Model No. CH3110) operates as an AC power source and when  
plugged in, also charges the battery installed in the unit.  
•
Desktop Docking Station (Model No. CH4000) operates as both a charger and a  
docking station. Operating as a charger, both the battery installed in the Ikôn and a spare  
battery can be charged simultaneously.  
•
Quad Docking Station (Model No. CH4004) can charge the battery of up to four Ikôns  
inserted in the docking station.  
Normally it takes 2.5 to 3 hours to charge a battery. The Ikôn intelligent charging system  
protects the battery from over-charging by terminating the charge process when the battery  
is at maximum capacity.  
Note: Refer to “Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time” on page 43 for addi-  
tional information about the battery.  
32  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
The Keyboards  
Important: To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge process  
until the battery temperature is between 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F).  
3.2  
The Keyboards  
3.2.1  
Ikôn Keyboards  
The following Ikôn keyboards are available:  
•
•
28-key numeric keyboard with or without [Talk] and [End] phone keys  
47-key QWERTY keyboard with [Talk] and [End] phone keys. This keyboard option is  
only available for Ikôns equipped with the Windows Mobile 6 Professional operating  
system.  
Figure 3.1 QWERTY And Numeric Keyboards With Phone Keys  
Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer. Where a key or  
key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard, the differences are noted.  
The [BLUE] and [ORANGE] modifier keys provide access to additional keys and  
system functions. These functions are colour coded in orange and blue print above the  
keyboard keys.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
Locking The Keyboard  
Note: Almost all keys can be reprogrammed to suit your requirements.  
3.2.2  
3.2.3  
Locking The Keyboard  
You can lock either or both the keyboard and the touchscreen so that accidental key presses  
are prevented. When the keyboard is locked, a padlock icon shows in the Taskbar.  
To lock the keyboard or touchscreen, go to Start>Settings>Control Panel>Keyboard Prop-  
erties>Lock Sequence and enable the options you need. When the keyboard is locked, a  
padlock icon shows in the Taskbar.  
Modifier Keys  
The [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [BLUE] and [ORANGE] keys are “modifier” keys. Pressing  
a modifier key changes the function of the next key pressed. For example, on an 47-key key-  
board, a left bracket is printed in orange print above the [U] key. Pressing the [ORANGE]  
key, a modifier key, followed by the [U] key displays a left bracket rather than the letter U.  
Note: Keep in mind that the [ALT] and [CTRL] keys are only available on numeric key-  
pads that are not equipped with phone keys. You can, however, access the [CTRL]  
key using the onscreen, soft keyboard.  
Figure 3.2 Ikôn Keyboard Without Phone Option  
The [SHIFT], [CTRL] and [ALT] keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that  
they are not chorded (two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier key must be  
pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified.  
34  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
Activating Modifier Keys  
3.2.3.1 Activating Modifier Keys  
When a modifier key is pressed once, it is displayed in lowercase letters in the taskbar at the  
bottom of the Ikôn screen. For example, if the [CTRL] key is pressed, ctrl key is displayed  
at the bottom of the unit screen. Once the next key is pressed, the modifier key becomes in-  
active and disappears from the taskbar.  
Keep in mind, however, that the ‘One Shot’ function allows you to determine how many key  
presses will lock a modifier key ‘on’—one press or two. Refer to “Keyboard One Shot  
Modes” on page 90 for details.  
3.2.3.2 Locking Modifier Keys  
When a modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked’ on. A ‘locked’ modifier key is displayed  
in uppercase letters in the taskbar. For example, pressing the [CTRL] key twice locks it  
on—it is displayed as CTRL KEY in the taskbar at the bottom of the computer screen.  
The locked modifier key will remain active until it is pressed a third time to unlock or turn it  
off. Once a modifier key is unlocked, the uppercase representation at the bottom of the  
screen is no longer displayed.  
3.2.4  
The Keys  
The [SHIFT] Key  
The [SHIFT] key is used to display uppercase alpha characters and provide access to the  
symbols above the numeric keys. You can lock this key ‘on’ so that when you press an alpha  
key, an upper case character is displayed. When you press a numeric key, the associated  
symbol on the numeric key is displayed on the screen.  
If you press the [SHIFT] key twice, it is locked ‘on’ essentially acting as a [CAPS] key, dis-  
playing uppercase characters. In this state, if you type a numeric key, the number rather than  
the symbol above it is displayed. Press [SHIFT] again to turn the [CAPS] function off.  
The Arrow Keys  
The Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow: up, down,  
left and right. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the  
next character you type will appear.  
The [SPACE] Key  
Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. In a Windows dialog box, press-  
ing the [SPACE] key enables or disables a checkbox.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
The Numeric Keyboard: Accessing Alpha Keys  
The [BKSP] Key  
The [BKSP] key (sometimes referred to as destructive backspace) moves the cursor one  
character to the left, erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke.  
The [CTRL] And [ALT] Key  
The [CTRL] and [ALT] keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are applica-  
tion-dependent. Note that these keys are only available on numeric keypads that are not  
equipped with [Talk] and [End] phone keys; however, you can access the [CTRL] key using  
the onscreen, soft keyboard.  
The [TAB] Key  
Typically, the [TAB] key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward.  
The [ESC] Key  
Generally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu, dialog box or  
activity and return to the previous one.  
The [SCAN] Keys  
All units are equipped with three yellow [SCAN] keys—one yellow key on the left side of  
the unit along with two yellow triangular keys just below the Ikôn display. For units that do  
not have internal scanners, this key can be re-mapped to another function.  
The Function Keys–[F1] to [F10]  
Function keys [F1] to [F10] perform special, custom-defined functions. These keys are ac-  
cessed by pressing [BLUE] followed by numeric keys [1] to [10]. They can be used with the  
Windows CE operating system or another application.  
The Macro Keys  
While macro keys are not physically stamped on the keyboard, up to 12 macro functions can  
be added using the Scancode Remapping function. Refer to “Scancode Remapping” on  
page 94 for details about mapping keys.  
For details about creating a macro, refer to “Keyboard Macro Keys” on page 91.  
3.2.5  
The Numeric Keyboard: Accessing Alpha Keys  
On numeric keyboards, while numeric keys are directly accessible, all alpha characters are  
printed on the unit plastic in orange typeface above the numeric keys. An indicator in the left  
corner of the taskbar displays the currently selected character. To access an alpha character,  
36  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
The Numeric Keyboard: Accessing Alpha Keys  
first press the [ORANGE] key and then press the numeric key above which the alpha char-  
acter you want to type is printed.  
Choosing A Single Alpha Character  
The examples below illustrate how to access, A, B, and C, all of which are printed in orange  
characters above the numeric key [2].  
Important: The letters you choose appear in the taskbar, providing a visual indicator of  
which letter will be displayed on the screen.  
To choose the letter a:  
•
Press the [ORANGE] key, and press the numeric key [2].  
Note: To choose the second, third or fourth alpha character assigned to a numeric key,  
you may want to lock the [ORANGE] key ‘on’. By default, the [ORANGE] key is  
locked ‘on’ when pressed once. However, depending on how your unit is set up in  
the ‘One Shots’ tab, you may find that you need to press the [ORANGE] key twice to  
lock it ‘on’. Refer to “Keyboard One Shot Modes” on page 90 for details.  
To choose the second letter in the sequence—in this example, the letter b:  
•
Lock the [ORANGE] key ‘on’. ORG KEY is displayed in upper-case characters in the  
taskbar to indicate that this key is locked ‘on’.  
•
Press numeric key [2] twice to display the letter b.  
To choose the third letter in the sequence—in this example, the letter c:  
•
•
Lock the [ORANGE] key ‘on’.  
Press numeric key [2] three times to display the letter c.  
Note: Keep in mind that there is a timeout if you pause for one second between key presses  
when selecting the second, third or fourth letters on a key. For example, suppose  
you want to type the letter ‘c’—you’d need to press the [2] key three times. With the  
[ORANGE] key locked ‘on’, if you press [2] twice and then pause between key  
presses for 1 second, the letter ‘b’ will be selected automatically.  
Creating Uppercase Letters  
To display a capital letter:  
•
Press the [ORANGE] key and then the [SHIFT] key before typing the alpha character.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
The Keypad Backlight  
Note: If you want to use uppercase characters at all times, press [BLUE] [SHIFT]. An  
icon of an uppercase ‘A’ is displayed in the taskbar indicating that all letters will be  
displayed as uppercase characters.  
Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters  
•
Lock the [ORANGE] key ‘on’.  
Each time you press a numeric key from [2] through [9], an alpha character will be dis-  
played on the screen. Remember that you can refer to the softkey bar for a visual indication  
of which alpha key will be displayed on the screen.  
Important: Once you have finished typing alpha characters, remember to turn off or  
unlock the [ORANGE] key.  
3.2.6  
The Keypad Backlight  
The intensity of the keypad backlight and the conditions under which this backlight is acti-  
vated can be configured using the Keyboard icon in the Windows CE 5.0 Control Panel. The  
behaviour of the keypad backlight is tailored in the Keyboard Properties dialog box. Refer  
to “Keyboard Backlight” on page 89 for details about this option.  
Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.  
3.3  
The Display  
Ikôn Rugged PDAs are equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility  
in low light conditions. The backlight switches on when a key is pressed or the screen  
is tapped.  
3.3.1  
3.3.2  
Adjusting The Display Backlight  
The Display Properties dialog box in the Control Panel allows you to determine the behav-  
iour of the display backlight and its intensity. Refer to “Display Backlight” on page 84 for  
details about the Display Properties dialog box.  
Calibrating The Touchscreen  
If your Ikôn touchscreen has never been calibrated, or if you find that the stylus pointer is  
not accurate when you tap on an item, use the Stylus Properties dialog box in the Control  
Panel to recalibrate the screen.  
38  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
Ikôn Rugged PDA Indicators  
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Properties window.  
Figure 3.3 Stylus Icon  
•
Select the Calibration tab, and then choose the Recalibrate button.  
Figure 3.4 Calibration Screen  
•
Follow the directions on the calibration screen to calibrate the screen.  
3.4  
Ikôn Rugged PDA Indicators  
The Ikôn uses LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), onscreen messages and audio tones to indi-  
cate the various conditions of the PDA, the batteries, the scans and so on.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
LEDs  
3.4.1  
LEDs  
Three LEDs are located on the upper-left side of the unit, above the screen. The green LED  
is the battery charge indicator; the yellow LED indicates an application; the blue LED indi-  
cates whether the radio is on or off. When you press [ENTER], the LED flashes green to  
indicate that the unit has been powered up. The LED table following outlines the behaviour  
of the LED while the unit is docked in a charger.  
Keep in mind that the application running on the Ikôn can dictate how the LED operates.  
Review the documentation provided with your application to determine LED behaviour.  
Table 3.1 Function Of Ikôn LEDs  
LED Behaviour  
Charge Status  
Green Charge LED  
(left-most LED)  
Charge indicator. See Table 3.2 for descriptions of Charge  
LED behaviour.  
Yellow Application LED  
(center LED)  
Application LED. This LED’s behaviour is application-dependent.  
Blue Radio Power LED  
(right-most LED)  
Radio power indicator.  
If the unit is attached to an external power supply, the Ikôn LED reflects the battery  
charge status.  
Note: The yellow LED flashes when powering up the Ikôn to show that it has started and  
the Power On/Off key may now be released.  
Table 3.2 Ikôn Charge LED Behaviour  
LED Behaviour  
Solid Green  
Charge Status  
Charge complete.  
Fast Blinking Green  
Slow Blinking Green  
Blinking Yellow  
Charge in progress. Battery charged to less than 80% capacity.  
Battery charged to greater than 80% of capacity.  
The battery is low (capacity < 100mAh); or the battery is too hot  
(>60°C).  
40  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
Audio Indicators  
3.4.2  
3.4.3  
Audio Indicators  
The audio speaker provides a variety of sounds when a key is pressed, a keyboard character  
is rejected, scan input is accepted or rejected, an operator’s entry does not match in a match  
field or the battery is low. To specify how you want your Ikôn to respond under various con-  
ditions, refer to “Volume And Sound Properties” on page 98.  
The grey volume key is located on the left side of the unit. To increase the volume, press the  
upper half of the key; to decrease the volume press the lower half.  
Onscreen Indicators  
The taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a variety of system status indicators.  
Figure 3.5 Taskbar  
The taskbar changes dynamically, and only those icons that are applicable are displayed. For  
example, if a radio is not installed in your Ikôn, the radio signal icon is not displayed in  
the taskbar.  
®
Windows Start Button  
If you are using the touchscreen, you can either tap the Windows icon at the bottom left of  
the screen, or press [ORANGE] [#] to display the Start Menu, and then tap on the desired  
application.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
Onscreen Indicators  
Modifier Key Indicators  
Note: The [CTRL] and [ALT] keys are only available on the keyboard when the Phone  
option is not installed in the Ikôn (see Figure 3.2 on page 34). Those keys are  
replaced by Phone keys when that option is present.  
[SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [BLUE] and [ORANGE] are modifier keys that when pressed,  
are displayed in the taskbar to indicate that they are active. If a modifier key is locked ‘on’, it  
is displayed in uppercase characters. For example, if the [BLUE] key is locked on, it is dis-  
played as BLUE KEY in the taskbar. A locked modifier key remains active until it is  
pressed again to unlock or turn it off.  
If a modifier key has been pressed but is not locked on, it is displayed in the taskbar in low-  
ercase characters—for example, blue key. It will remain active only until the next key is  
pressed at which point, the modifier key is turned off.  
Note: The locking function of the modifier keys can be set up so that pressing one of these  
keys once will lock the key ‘on’. They can also be set up so that they must be pressed  
twice to be locked ‘on’. Refer to “Keyboard One Shot Modes” on page 90  
for details.  
Battery Gauge  
The battery shaped icon displayed in the taskbar provides a visual indication of the remain-  
ing battery power. The icon acts as a meter that is either full, at three-quarter level, half,  
quarter level or empty.  
When the battery level is low—approximately 15 minutes from empty—a warning window  
pops up. When the battery power is completely depleted, a final warning window indicates  
that the Ikôn will be powered down.  
If the Ikôn is using external AC power, an AC icon is displayed in the taskbar.  
Full  
75%  
50%  
25%  
Empty  
AC Connection  
Battery Charge  
The battery charge icon is displayed in the taskbar when the Ikôn battery is being charged.  
42  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time  
802.11 Radio Signal Quality  
Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer, filled bars within this icon.  
Good  
Reception  
Weak  
Reception  
No Radio  
Link  
Docking Device  
When an Ikôn is inserted in a docking station or charger, an associated icon appears in  
the taskbar.  
Bluetooth Radio  
This icon displayed in the taskbar represents the installed Bluetooth radio.  
Security Level  
Security levels can be set to limit user access. In addition, applications can be restricted to  
prevent inadvertent changes.  
Wireless WAN  
These icons provide access to and information about the Ikôn GSM/GPRS wide area net-  
working status. Refer to Appendix B: “Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)” for details  
about each of these taskbar icons.  
Dialer Icon  
The dialer (phone) icon is displayed when the Voice option is available (a SIM card and  
GPRS radio are installed). You can access the phone dialer by double-tapping on this icon.  
When you have an active call, the dialer icon flashes yellow and then green.  
3.5  
Monitoring The Battery And Maximizing Run Time  
Note: When the main battery is at 50% capacity, a ‘low battery’ warning is displayed.  
When the battery is at approximately 10% capacity, a ‘very low main battery’ noti-  
fication appears.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
Storing Batteries  
As Lithium Ion batteries age, their capacity decreases gradually, and they are generally con-  
sidered depleted after approximately 2 years of use (less than 60% of original capacity  
remaining). Keep in mind however that heavy usage or operating the unit at temperature ex-  
tremes will shorten the battery life.  
Lithium Ion batteries do not require conditioning cycles and the Ikôn battery system (includ-  
ing chargers) requires no user interaction to maintain peak performance.  
To maximize the run time of your batteries, consider the following:  
•
The display backlight is a large drain on the battery. Try to keep its brightness as low  
as possible.  
•
The Ikôn is ‘event’ driven—that is, when the unit is not in use, it reverts to sleep mode  
(even when it appears to be running), saving battery power. Events include a key press,  
touchscreen taps and scan triggers. Power consumption is reduced if you avoid unneces-  
sary events, and allow the unit to sleep as much as possible.  
•
•
The battery is a ‘smart battery’ with built-in intelligence.  
Tapping on the Power icon in the Control Panel displays a dialog box that provides  
detailed information about the battery status of the main battery installed in your unit.  
When the Ikôn is switched off, it goes into a low-power, suspend state but continues to  
draw a small amount of power from the battery. This should not be an issue unless the  
unit is left in suspend state for more than a week—for long-term storage, the battery  
should be removed from the unit.  
3.5.1  
Storing Batteries  
Long term battery storage is not recommended. If storage is necessary:  
•
•
Always try to use a ‘first-in first-out’ approach to minimize storage time.  
Lithium Ion batteries age much faster at elevated temperatures. Store batteries at tem-  
peratures between 0°C and 20°C (32°F and 68°F).  
•
Always charge batteries to at least 40 to 60% before storing them. Batteries can be  
damaged by an over-discharge phenomenon that occurs when an empty battery is stored  
for a long period of time such that the cell voltage drops below a lower limit.  
•
•
To minimize storage degradation, recharge stored batteries to 40 to 60% every 4 or 6  
months to prevent over-discharge damage.  
A ‘never used’ Li-Ion battery that has been stored for 3 years may have limited or no  
useful life remaining once put into service. Think of batteries as perishable goods.  
44  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
Uploading Data In A Docking Station  
3.6  
Uploading Data In A Docking Station  
Important: Review the documentation provided with the user application installed in  
your Ikôn before performing data uploads.  
The desktop docking station and quad docking station are typically used to upload transac-  
tion data to a server computer when a radio link is not available.  
Note: Refer to “CH4004 Quad Docking Station” on page 227 for more details.  
The desktop docking station can complete batch uploads to a Client USB connected PC  
or server.  
Unlike the desktop docking station, the quad docking station supports only TCP/IP connec-  
tions to a PC or server through a 10/100baseT Ethernet connection.  
When an Ikôn is properly inserted in a docking station, a dock icon is displayed in the navi-  
gation bar at the top of the screen. The unit also detects the presence of the  
Ethernet network.  
3.7  
Bluetooth Radio  
Note: Integrated Bluetooth radios are standard on Ikôn Rugged PDA units. Keep in mind  
also that Bluetooth is available simultaneously with WAN and 802.11g on a  
single unit.  
The Ikôn is equipped with an on-board Bluetooth radio. This type of radio enables short  
range data communication between devices. The Bluetooth also provides the capability to  
use a Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone as a data modem, exchanging information with other  
Bluetooth devices and providing network access. Refer to “Bluetooth Setup” on page 111  
for setup details.  
You can also pair your hand-set with a Bluetooth headset.  
3.7.1  
Pairing A Bluetooth Headset Or Other Bluetooth Device  
Note: If the Bluetooth radio is not already enabled, tap on the Power icon in the Control  
Panel, tap on the Devices tab and enable the Bluetooth radio.  
To pair a headset:  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
Inserting The microSD And SIM Cards  
•
•
Follow the headset manufacturer’s instructions to place the headset you want to place in  
pairing mode.  
In the Control Panel, tap on the Bluetooth icon choose the Devices tab and scan for  
devices in your area. (Note that if you’re pairing the device for the first time, the device  
scan occurs automatically—you do not need to tap on the Scan button to perform  
a scan.)  
When the scan is complete, a list of devices is listed.  
•
Double-click on the headset you want to pair with. If you prefer, you can highlight  
headset and tap on the Services button.  
If the headset has authentication enabled, a dialog box appears requesting that you enter a  
PIN number.  
•
Type your pin number and tap on OK.  
A Services dialog box appears listing headset.  
Press and hold the stylus on headset. In the pop-up menu, choose Active.  
•
Your headset is now paired. A COM/BSP port name will now appear beside the service for  
this device. An asterisk will appear under the Active list in the Service screen.  
3.8  
Inserting The microSD And SIM Cards  
There are two slots available in the battery compartment—the left-hand slot is provided for a  
microSD (Secure Digital Card) and the right-hand slot is for a SIM (Subscriber Identity  
Module) card.  
The microSD cards provide additional non-volatile memory to your Ikôn. SIM cards allow  
access to the Ikôn Voice option, access the Internet, and so on.  
3.8.1  
Inserting The Cards  
•
•
•
•
Switch off the Ikôn.  
Remove the battery cover and the battery.  
Pull the SD door down as the arrow icon on the door indicates.  
Orient the microSD or SIM card according to the legend stamped into the battery  
well plastic.  
•
•
For microSDs, slide the card into the left-hand slot, pushing it inward until it latches  
into place.  
For SIM cards, slide the card into the right-hand slot, pushing it inward until it latches  
into place.  
46  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Ikôn  
General Maintenance  
•
Slide the door back into place, and snap it shut.  
To remove the card:  
•
Gently press it inward slightly until the detent unlatches, and the card is expelled from  
the slot.  
3.9  
General Maintenance  
3.9.1  
Caring For The Touchscreen  
The top of the touchscreen is a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive  
coating on the inside. The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is  
susceptible to abrasions and scratches. Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or  
cut the plastic, or crack the internal conductive coating.  
The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen:  
•
•
•
•
sodium hydroxide,  
concentrated caustic solutions,  
benzyl alcohol, and  
concentrated acids.  
If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments, consider applying a disposable screen pro-  
tector (CH6110). These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically  
extend the useful life of the touchscreen. When they become scratched and abraded, they are  
easily removed and replaced.  
3.9.2  
Cleaning The Ikôn  
Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent  
to wipe the unit clean.  
•
•
Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the Ikôn.  
Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is  
susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and  
gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.  
•
To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen, use isopropyl alcohol.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WORKING WITH WINDOWS CE 5.0  
4
4.1 Navigating In Windows CE 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
4.1.2 Navigating Using The Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
4.2 Working With Files, Folders And Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
4.3 The Startup Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
4.3.1 The Desktop Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
4.3.2 The Taskbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
4.3.2.1 Using The Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
4.3.2.2 Customizing The Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
4.4 The Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
4.4.1 The Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
4.4.2 Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
4.4.3 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
4.4.4 Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
4.4.5 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
4.4.6 Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
4.4.7 Shutdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
4.5 Using A Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
Navigating In Windows CE 5.0  
4.1  
Navigating In Windows CE 5.0  
Note: In order to access many of the menus discussed in this chapter, the security level  
must be set to ‘Supervisor’ (see “Security Settings” on page 60).  
Graphic user interfaces like Windows CE 5.0 for portable devices and desktop Windows  
(2000, XP, etc.) utilize ‘point and click’ navigation. An equivalent keyboard shortcut is also  
available for every ‘point and click’ action.  
Windows CE 5.0 supports the same ‘point and click’ user interface and keyboard shortcuts  
as desktop Windows with one difference—the ‘point and click’ action is accomplished  
using a touchscreen rather than a mouse. Actions can be performed using any combination  
of keyboard shortcuts or touchscreen tapping.  
4.1.1  
Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus  
Note: If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately, the touchscreen  
may need recalibration. Refer to “Calibrating The Touchscreen” on page 38.  
Each Ikôn is equipped with a stylus—a pointing tool that looks like a pen—stored in a slot at  
the top of the unit. The stylus is used to select objects on the touchscreen.  
Note: To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only the stylus (pen) supplied with your  
Ikôn Rugged PDA.  
To choose an icon, open a file, launch an applet, or open a folder:  
•
Double-tap the stylus on the appropriate icon.  
4.1.2  
Navigating Using The Keyboard  
If your Ikôn touchscreen has been disabled, you can use the keyboard to choose icons, navi-  
gate dialog boxes, display the desktop, and so on. If your unit has already been fully  
configured and your application is launched at startup, you’ll have little need for keyboard  
navigation, but you can refer to Table 4.1 for a description of the navigation keys.  
Table 4.1 Keyboard Navigation  
Operation  
Key or Key Combination  
Switch between active applications [ALT] [TAB]  
Open task manager  
[ALT] [ESC]  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
Navigating Using The Keyboard  
Table 4.1 Keyboard Navigation  
Operation  
Key or Key Combination  
Arrow keys  
[ENTER]  
Move the cursor  
Open file, folder or icon  
Exit & Save  
[ENTER]  
Close/Exit & Do Not Save  
Navigate Dialog Boxes  
[ESC]  
[TAB]  
To move cursor up: [SHIFT] [TAB]  
To display the contents of the next ‘tab’ in a dialog box:  
[CTRL] [TAB]  
Select Radio Button/Press Button  
Go to Start Menu  
[SPACE]  
[BLUE][0]  
Note: The [CTRL] and [ALT] keys are only available on the keyboard when the Phone  
option is not installed in the Ikôn (see Figure 3.2 on page 34). Those keys are  
replaced by Phone keys when that option is present.  
Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer, the Ikôn does not support key chording (press-  
ing two keys at the same time). You must press one key followed by the next in sequence.  
Refer to Section 4.2: “Working With Files, Folders And Programs” for additional details  
about keyboard navigation.  
52  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
Working With Files, Folders And Programs  
4.2  
Working With Files, Folders And Programs  
Figure 4.1 Working With Windows Icons  
Folder  
Program Icon  
File  
•
Double-tap on the appropriate icon—either a folder icon, a program icon or a file  
icon—to open or launch your selection.  
If you’re using the keyboard:  
•
•
Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon you want to open or launch.  
Press [ENTER].  
4.3  
The Startup Desktop  
When the Ikôn boots up, the startup desktop (shell) is displayed. Any applications stored in  
the Startup folder start up immediately.  
Note: The startup folder is located in \Windows\StartUp and \Flash Disk\StartUp.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
The Desktop Icons  
Figure 4.2 The Ikôn Startup Desktop  
To access desktop icons:  
•
Double-tap on the icon to open a window or, in the case of an application icon, launch  
an application.  
On the keyboard:  
•
Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon, and press [ENTER] to launch the  
highlighted icon.  
Note: If the arrow keys do not highlight the desktop icons, the desktop may not be selected.  
Press [ORANGE] [#] to display the Start Menu, and select Desktop. Now the desk-  
top will be “in focus” and the arrow keys will highlight the icons.  
4.3.1  
The Desktop Icons  
The icons displayed in the startup desktop operate in much the same way as those displayed  
on any standard PC desktop that is running Windows.  
My Device  
Choosing this icon displays the contents of your Ikôn computer. If you’re not sure how to  
access the files, folders and programs displayed, refer to “Working With Files, Folders And  
Programs” on page 53.  
54  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
The Taskbar  
Recycle Bin  
This option temporarily stores items that were deleted, allowing you to either permanently  
delete or restore these items.  
Internet Explorer  
Choosing this icon launches Internet Explorer—a standard Windows CE 5.0 version. Keep  
in mind that your supervisor will need to set up access using the Internet Options and the  
Network and Dial-up Connections icons in the Control Panel.  
Remote Desktop Connection  
This option allows your Ikôn to communicate with a remote desktop PC. “Remote Desktop  
Connection” on page 77 provides a website with step-by-step instructions.  
4.3.2  
The Taskbar  
Figure 4.3 The Taskbar  
The Ikôn is equipped with a taskbar at the bottom of the screen. It displays icons through  
which you can view the battery capacity and radio signal quality of your unit. If the Ikôn is  
attached to a charger, cradle, docking station or PDM, an associated icon is displayed. In ad-  
dition, the taskbar displays the application(s) currently running on your unit and the security  
level assigned to your Ikôn.  
The taskbar also displays active modifier keys: [SHIFT], [ALT], [CTRL], [BLUE] and [OR-  
ANGE]. Keys that have been locked “on” are displayed in uppercase letters. For example, if  
you have set the [CTRL] key Lock to “on” in the Keyboard menu and you press the key, it is  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
Using The Taskbar  
displayed as CTRL KEY in the taskbar. (For detailed information on modifier keys and key-  
board options, see “The Keyboards” on page 33).  
4.3.2.1 Using The Taskbar  
A tooltip is displayed as each taskbar icon is highlighted. The tooltip provides the status of  
each icon.  
If you’re using the touchscreen:  
•
Tap and hold the stylus on an icon to display the icon's tooltip. Double-tap the icon to  
open the Control Panel dialog box associated with the icon. For example, double-tap the  
battery icon to display a dialog box listing the current battery capacity information.  
On the keyboard:  
•
•
Press [ORANGE] [#] to display the Start Menu.  
Choose Shortcuts from the Start Menu, and then press the [RIGHT] arrow key to  
display the sub-menu.  
•
•
Choose System Tray in the sub-menu.  
Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon in the taskbar about which you’d like more  
information.  
•
Press [ENTER] to display the appropriate dialog box.  
4.3.2.2 Customizing The Taskbar  
To customize the taskbar so that it displays only those icons you require:  
In the Start Menu, choose Settings>Taskbar.  
If you’re using the keyboard:  
•
•
•
Press [ORANGE] [#] to display the Start Menu.  
Highlight the Settings option, highlight Taskbar in the sub-menu, and press [ENTER].  
The Taskbar and Start Menu dialog box is displayed.  
56  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
Customizing The Taskbar  
Taskbar General Tab  
•
Tap the stylus on the items you want to activate or deactivate. The check mark indicates  
active items.  
If you’re using the keyboard:  
•
Highlight the options you want to activate, and press the [SPACE] key to select them.  
The check mark indicates active items.  
Taskbar Advanced Tab  
•
•
Tap on the Clear button to empty the Documents folder.  
To display Control Panel applets in menu form rather than in a window, tap in the  
checkbox next to Expand Control Panel.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
The Start Menu  
Taskbar Security Tab  
If you check Disable hot keys, the Application from Start menu field becomes enabled. Use  
this field to enter the name of the application you want to run when the user presses the  
Menu hot key: [ORANGE] [#].  
If you have disabled hot keys, hidden the Start Menu and have no application configured,  
the Menu hot key brings up the Security dialog box to allow authorized users to access the  
terminal configuration. Keep in mind that this dialog box is also displayed if an invalid ap-  
plication is entered in the Application from Start Menu field.  
4.4  
The Start Menu  
Note: Some of the Start Menu items may be disabled based on the current Ikôn  
security settings.  
The Start Menu lists the operations you can access and work with. It is available from the  
startup desktop or from within any application.  
To display the menu:  
•
Press [ORANGE] [#].  
Note: Tap on the item in the menu with which you want to work.  
58  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
The Desktop  
Figure 4.4 Start Menu  
If you’re using the keyboard:  
•
Use the arrow keys to highlight a menu item, and press [ENTER], or  
If the menu item has an underlined character:  
•
Type the underlined alpha character. For example, to display the Security dialog box,  
type the letter ‘s’.  
4.4.1  
The Desktop  
Choosing Desktop in the Start Menu displays the Ikôn desktop.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
   
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
Security Settings  
Figure 4.5 The Ikôn Desktop  
4.4.2  
Security Settings  
Choosing the Security option from the Start Menu displays a dialog box in which you can  
define the access level for the Ikôn: Supervisor or User.  
Figure 4.6 Security Levels  
Assigning The Supervisor Security Level  
The security level is represented by an icon in the shape of a lock in the taskbar. The security  
levels define the options accessible to the operator in the Start Menu and the taskbar.  
By default, the security level is set to User, restricting access to only the most basic Start  
Menu items.  
To allow access to all the Start Menu and taskbar options:  
•
In the Security Level dialog box, tap on the radio button next to Supervisor.  
60  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
Security Settings  
•
•
In the Password field, type the Supervisor level password. The default password is  
123456.  
Tap on OK. You can now access all menu items in the Start Menu along with the icons  
in the taskbar.  
Changing A Password  
Note: Keep in mind that this is the same password as that assigned through the Password  
control panel applet. Refer to “Control Panel Icons” on page 78.  
To assign a password:  
•
•
Choose a security level, and enter the existing password in the Password field.  
Tap on the Set Password button.  
A dialog box labelled Password Properties is displayed.  
•
•
Type the new password in the Password: text box (all keyboard characters are valid).  
In the Confirm Password: text box, retype the new password.  
Configuring Security  
Choosing the Configure button displays the Configure Security dialog box.  
Figure 4.7 Configuring Security  
This dialog box allows you to determine which security levels will have an associated icon  
displayed in the taskbar. By default, a security icon is not displayed for user-level security.  
Note: It is recommended that you enable ‘Allow Teklogix Security Level’ so that autho-  
rized Psion Teklogix service personnel can access your unit should it require  
maintenance.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
Programs  
4.4.3  
Programs  
•
Choose Programs to display a sub-menu of options.  
Figure 4.8 Program Sub-Menu  
®
ActiveSync  
This option allows you to connect to another device using ActiveSync.  
Demo  
This folder contains the Demo Scanner, Demo Signature, and Demo Sound applications.  
Demo Scanner can be used to test how the Ikôn reads and writes RFID tags. Demo Signature  
allows you to capture a signature written on the screen with your stylus and save it to a file.  
Demo Sound allows you to record and playback. The ‘Sample Rate’ and the ‘Bits Per  
Sample’ are the rates at which the sound will be recorded. Sounds recorded at the higher  
sample rate or bits per sample will be higher quality but will require more file space to store.  
Lower sample rates and bits per sample or both the file result in a smaller file but the quality  
suffers. The record and play buttons operate in the same way they do on any recording  
device. the ‘X’ icon deletes the sound and the ‘diskette’ icon allows you to save your sound.  
Summit  
This folder provides access to the Summit Client Utility (SCU), a utility that allows you to  
configure your Summit 802.11b/g radio.  
62  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
Shortcuts  
Command Prompt  
Command Prompt is used to access the DOS command prompt. At the prompt, you can type  
DOS commands such as dir to display all the directories in the drive.  
Internet Explorer  
The Ikôn is equipped with Microsoft Internet Explorer for Windows CE 5.0. You can access  
the Internet Options icon through the Start Menu under Settings>Control Panel or by  
double-tapping on the desktop Internet Explorer icon.  
Remote Connect  
Remote Connect is an Ikôn application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so  
that you can run a “session” on the Server machine using the Ikôn (Windows CE 5.0 de-  
vice). “Remote Desktop Connection” on page 77 provides a website with details about this  
option.  
Windows Explorer  
The Windows Explorer installed on your Ikôn is consistent with all Windows CE 5.0 de-  
vices. You can access this option from the Start Menu under Programs> Windows Explorer.  
4.4.4  
Shortcuts  
Figure 4.9 Shortcuts Sub-Menu  
System Tray  
If your touchscreen is not enabled, you can use the System Tray option to access the icons in  
the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. The taskbar displays indicators such as a radio signal  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
Shortcuts  
icon and the security level. These indicators are attached to dialog boxes that provide addi-  
tional information.  
Choose Shortcuts>System Tray.  
•
Using the icons in the taskbar, you can either display the Control Panel dialog box associ-  
ated with an icon, or you can view a “tooltip”. A tooltip provides the status of each icon.  
•
Tap and hold the stylus on an icon to display the icon’s tooltip. Double-tap on the icon to  
open the Control Panel dialog box associated with the icon.  
On the keyboard:  
•
•
Press [ORANGE] [#] to display the Start Menu.  
Choose Shortcuts from the Start Menu, and then press the [RIGHT] arrow key to  
display the sub-menu.  
•
•
Choose System Tray in the sub-menu.  
Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon in the taskbar about which you’d like more  
information. As each icon is highlighted, a tooltip is displayed.  
•
To display the associated Control Panel dialog box, press [ENTER].  
Cycle Tasks  
When Cycle Tasks is selected (and the Task Manager is not open), you can cycle through  
active applications.  
To cycle through your active applications:  
•
Choose Shortcuts>Cycle Tasks, or  
Press [ALT] [TAB].  
Task Manager  
The Task Manager allows you to switch to another task or to end an active task. To display  
the task manager window:  
•
Tap on Shortcuts>Task Manager, or  
Press [ALT] [ESC].  
64  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
Settings  
Figure 4.10 Task Manager  
4.4.5  
Settings  
The Settings sub-menu includes the following settings: Control Panel, Network and Dial-up  
Connections, and Taskbar and Start Menu.  
Figure 4.11 Settings Sub-Menu  
Control Panel  
The Control Panel contains applets used to configure hardware, the operating system and  
the shell. If your Ikôn is running with the Psion Teklogix TekTerm application or another ap-  
plication, additional configuration applets may appear in the Control Panel.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
Run  
Network And Dial-Up Connections  
The Network and Dial-up Connections window allows you to configure the Ikôn radio or  
execute an existing configuration. Refer to “Configuring The Summit 802.11b/g” on  
page 13 for radio setup details.  
Taskbar And Start Menu  
The Taskbar and Start Menu option displays a dialog box in which you can customize the  
taskbar, choosing which options will be displayed. Refer to “Customizing The Taskbar” on  
page 56 for additional details about this option.  
4.4.6  
4.4.7  
66  
Run  
Choosing the Run option from the Start Menu displays a dialog box in which you can enter  
the name of the program, folder or document you want to open or launch.  
Figure 4.12 Run Dialog Box  
Shutdown  
The Shutdown menu includes these options in a sub-menu: Suspend, Warm Reset, and Cold  
Reset. For detailed information on Warm and Cold Reset, see “Resetting The Ikôn” on  
page 26. For other options for turning the Ikôn off, see Section 2.3.3 on page 12.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
Using A Dialog Box  
Figure 4.13 Shutdown Sub-Menu  
Note: This menu varies slightly depending on the security level chosen. When the Ikôn is  
set to User level, the Shutdown option is replaced by Suspend. A sub-menu is  
not available.  
Suspend  
The Suspend option suspends the Ikôn immediately. This is equivalent to turning the  
Ikôn off. Radios such as the GPRS or UMTS can still operate while the device is suspended.  
In this case the blue LED radio indicator will continue blinking.  
To shutdown with all radios off, please refer to “Switching The Ikôn Off” on page 12.  
Warm Reset  
The Warm Reset option resets the Ikôn, leaving all saved files and (registry) settings intact.  
Contents of RAM are preserved.  
Cold Reset  
The Cold Reset option resets the Ikôn, leaving all saved files and (registry) settings intact,  
and resets the hardware. Contents of RAM are lost.  
4.5  
Using A Dialog Box  
A dialog box (like the samples in Figure 4.14 on page 68) appears when you need to make  
selections and enter further information. You can move between dialog items by tapping on  
them with your stylus, or by pressing the arrow keys and the [TAB] key ([SHIFT] [TAB]  
moves the cursor backwards).  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
Using A Dialog Box  
Figure 4.14 Dialog Boxes  
Tabs  
Radio  
Button  
Textbox  
Drop-down Menu  
Button  
Checkbox  
Note: You can use the stylus to tap on an element in a dialog box to select or deselect it,  
display drop-down menus, save your selections, and so on.  
Dialog boxes contain one or more of the following elements:  
Tab: A tab separates different elements of a dialog box. Press the [TAB] key until a tab in  
the dialog box is highlighted. To display adjoining tabs, press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow  
key. To display the information in the next tab from anywhere in the window, press  
[CTRL] [TAB].  
Textbox: A textbox requires that you type information. Press the [TAB] key to highlight the  
textbox and then type the appropriate information.  
Drop-down: This type of menu is identified by up and down arrows next to the drop-down  
menu to indicate that additional options are available. Press the [TAB] key to highlight the  
menu, and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to cycle through the options.  
Checkbox: This box allows you to select or deselect an option. To select or deselect a  
checkbox, press the [TAB] key to highlight the checkbox, and press the [SPACE] key to  
select or deselect it.  
Radio buttons: These buttons allow you to choose from a number of options. For example,  
in the sample screen in Figure 4.14 on page 68 you can choose to Obtain an IP address via  
DHCP or Specify an IP address. Press the [TAB] key to highlight a radio button option, and  
then select a radio button by pressing the arrow keys to highlight the appropriate option.  
68  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE 5.0  
Using A Dialog Box  
Buttons: This type of button allows you to Save, Delete and so on the options you’ve chosen  
in a dialog box. Use the [TAB] key to highlight the button you want to use. Press the  
[ENTER] key to activate it.  
Saving Your Choices: Once you’ve made all your changes, press the [ENTER] key to save  
your changes and exit the window.  
Note: A dialog box item that is displayed in grey text indicates that it is not  
currently available.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONFIGURATION  
5
5.1 Remote Desktop Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
5.2 The TekTerm Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
5.3 The Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
5.4 Control Panel Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
5.5 Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
5.5.1 App Launch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
5.5.2 Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
5.5.2.1 Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
5.5.2.2 Display Appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
5.5.3 Keyboard Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
5.5.3.1 Key Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
5.5.3.2 Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
5.5.3.3 Keyboard Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
5.5.3.4 Keyboard One Shot Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
5.5.3.5 Keyboard Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
5.5.3.6 Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
5.5.3.7 Scancode Remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
5.5.3.8 Lock Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
5.5.4 Volume And Sound Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
5.5.4.1 Volume Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
5.5.4.2 Sound Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
5.5.5 Power Management Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
5.5.5.1 Battery Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
5.5.5.2 Power Saving Suspend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
5.5.5.3 Suspend Threshold And Estimated Battery Backup . . . . . . . .102  
5.5.5.4 Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
5.5.5.5 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
5.5.5.6 GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
5.5.6 Stylus Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
5.5.6.1 Double-Tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
5.5.6.2 Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
5.5.6.3 Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
5.5.7 Manage Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5.5.7.1 Trigger Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
5.5.7.2 Add And Edit Trigger Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
5.5.8 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
5.6 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
5.6.1 Bluetooth Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
5.6.1.1 Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
5.6.1.2 Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
5.6.1.3 Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
5.6.1.4 Outgoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
5.6.1.5 Active Conn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
5.6.1.6 Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
5.6.1.7 Search For . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
5.6.2 The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
5.7 Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
5.7.1 Creating A Backup Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
5.7.2 Restoring A Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
5.8 TweakIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
5.8.1 Advanced Interface And Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
5.8.2 Advanced Services Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
5.8.3 User Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
5.8.4 User System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
5.8.5 Registry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
5.9 Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
5.10 Teklogix Error Handling Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
5.10.1 ErrorLogInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
5.11 The Storage Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
5.11.1 Formatting A Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
5.11.2 Creating Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
5.11.3 Partition Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
5.12 IPv6 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
5.13 Teklogix Imagers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
5.13.1 Configuring The Image Capture Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
5.13.1.1 Selecting A Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
5.13.1.2 Setting The Active Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
5.13.1.3 Viewing A Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
5.13.1.4 Creating A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
72  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.1.5 Modifying A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143  
5.13.1.6 Removing A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144  
5.13.2 Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets . . . . . . . . . . .145  
5.13.2.1 Selecting A Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146  
5.13.2.2 Setting The Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146  
5.13.2.3 Viewing A Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146  
5.13.2.4 Creating A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147  
5.13.2.5 Modifying A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148  
5.13.2.6 Removing A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149  
5.13.3 Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Symbology Presets . . . . . . . . .149  
5.13.3.1 Selecting A Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150  
5.13.3.2 Setting The Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150  
5.13.3.3 Viewing A Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151  
5.13.3.4 Creating A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151  
5.13.3.5 Modifying A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152  
5.13.3.6 Removing A Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153  
5.13.3.7 Working With The My Default Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154  
5.13.4 Manipulating Bar Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154  
5.13.4.1 Modifying A Bar Code Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155  
5.13.5 Configuring Translation Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156  
5.13.6 Obtaining Information On the Imaging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157  
5.13.7 Configuring File Locations For Captured Images . . . . . . . . . . . . .158  
5.13.8 Configuring Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160  
5.13.8.1 Viewing The Trigger Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160  
5.13.8.2 Adding, Editing, And Removing Triggers. . . . . . . . . . . . .161  
5.14 Scanner Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161  
5.14.1 Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162  
5.14.1.1 Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162  
5.14.1.2 Restoring Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163  
5.14.2 Decoded (Internal) Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164  
5.14.2.1 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164  
5.14.2.2 Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165  
5.14.2.3 Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . .167  
5.14.2.4 Decoded (Internal) Data Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167  
5.14.2.5 Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168  
5.14.2.6 Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171  
5.14.2.7 EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171  
5.14.2.8 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172  
5.14.2.9 UPC A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172  
5.14.2.10 UPC E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.14.2.11 UPC/EAN Shared Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
5.14.2.12 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
5.14.2.13 Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
5.14.2.14 MSI Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
5.14.2.15 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
5.14.2.16 Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
5.14.2.17 RSS Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
5.14.2.18 Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
5.14.2.19 PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
5.14.2.20 Micro PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
5.14.3 Decoded (ISCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
5.14.3.1 Decoded (ISCP) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
5.14.3.2 Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
5.14.3.3 Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
5.14.3.4 Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
5.14.3.5 EAN 13 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
5.14.3.6 EAN 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
5.14.3.7 UPC A Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
5.14.3.8 UPC E Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
5.14.3.9 UPC/EAN Shared Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
5.14.3.10 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
5.14.3.11 Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
5.14.3.12 MSI Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
5.14.3.13 Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
5.14.3.14 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
5.14.3.15 Matrix 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
5.14.3.16 Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
5.14.3.17 Telepen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
5.14.3.18 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology) . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
5.14.3.19 PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
5.14.3.20 Micro PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
5.14.3.21 Codablock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
5.14.4 Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
5.14.4.1 Imager Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
5.14.4.2 Imager Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
5.14.4.3 Code 39 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
5.14.4.4 Code 128 Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
5.14.4.5 EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
5.14.4.6 EAN 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
5.14.4.7 UPC A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
5.14.4.8 UPC E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
74  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.14.4.9 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200  
5.14.4.10 Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201  
5.14.4.11 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201  
5.14.4.12 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology). . . . . . . . . . . . .201  
5.14.4.13 Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201  
5.14.4.14 PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201  
5.14.4.15 Micro PDF-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202  
5.14.4.16 2D Data Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202  
5.14.4.17 2D QR Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202  
5.14.4.18 2D Maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202  
5.14.4.19 2D Aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202  
5.14.4.20 Postal: PlaNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203  
5.14.4.21 Postal: PostNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203  
5.14.4.22 Postal: Australian. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203  
5.14.4.23 Postal: Japanese. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203  
5.14.4.24 Postal: Korean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203  
5.14.4.25 Postal: Royal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204  
5.14.5 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204  
5.14.5.1 Double Click Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204  
5.14.5.2 Display Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205  
5.14.6 Translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206  
5.14.6.1 Case Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Remote Desktop Connection  
5.1  
Remote Desktop Connection  
Remote Desktop Connection is a Windows application that enables you to connect to a com-  
puter across the Internet using the Ikôn (Windows CE 5.0 device).  
Refer to the following website for step-by-step information about setting up this connection:  
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsxp/using/mobility/getstarted/remoteintro.mspx  
or contact Psion Teklogix support services. (Refer to the Ikôn Rugged PDA Regulatory &  
Warranty Guide, PN 8000148, or locate the office closest to you at www.psionteklogix.com).  
5.2  
5.3  
The TekTerm Application  
TekTerm is a powerful emulation application ideally suited for real time data transaction ap-  
plications associated with mainframes and servers. The Ikôn includes unique features that  
support TekTerm—a Psion Teklogix application that has the ability to maintain multiple si-  
multaneous sessions with a variety of host computers. For detailed information, please refer  
to the TekTerm Software User Manual, PN 8000073.  
The Control Panel  
The Windows CE 5.0 Control Panel provides a group of icons through which you can set a  
variety of system-wide properties, such as mouse sensitivity, network configuration and the  
desktop color scheme.  
Note: If you are uncertain how to move around a dialog box and make selections, review  
“Using A Dialog Box” on page 67.  
When the Ikôn boots up, the startup desktop (shell) is displayed, and any applications stored  
in the Startup folder start up immediately.  
To access the Control Panel:  
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel.  
If you’re using the keyboard:  
•
•
Press [ORANGE] [#] to display the Start Menu.  
Highlight Settings in Start Menu, and press the [RIGHT] arrow key to highlight the  
Control Panel.  
•
Press the [ENTER] key.  
The Control Panel folder contains icons used in the setup of your Ikôn.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Control Panel Icons  
Figure 5.1 Control Panel  
5.4  
Control Panel Icons  
The Control Panel provides a group of icons that allow you to customize and adjust settings  
on your Ikôn.  
App Launch Keys  
By mapping keys to applications using this program, you can then launch those applications  
from a single key-press.  
Bluetooth Devices  
Provides the tools to manage device pairing and configuration.  
Certificates  
A public key is transmitted as part of a certificate. The certificate assigned through this icon  
is used to ensure that the submitted public key is, in fact, the public key that belongs to the  
submitter. The client checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification  
authority that the client explicitly trusts. “Certificates” on page 110 directs you to the appro-  
priate setup information.  
78  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Control Panel Icons  
Date/Time  
Allows you to set the current Month, Date, Time and Time Zone on your unit.  
Dialing  
Specifies dialing settings, including area code, country code, dial type and the code to  
disable call waiting. You can store multiple patterns—for example, ‘Work’, ‘Home’, and so  
on using this dialog box.  
Display  
Changes the appearance (window colour scheme) on the unit desktop.  
Error Reporting  
Allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts.  
Input Panel  
Provides the framework for a Soft Input Panel (SIP) should you need to design your own  
SIP, or change some soft keyboard options.  
Internet Options  
Provides options to configure your Internet browser. You can determine items such as the  
default and search page that the browser applies when connecting to the Internet, the cache  
size, the Internet connection options, and the security level that is applied when browsing.  
IPv6 Support  
Refers to a new Internet Protocol specification (version 6) that has been published to use  
128-bit IP addresses (replacing version 4).  
Keyboard  
Toggles character repeat on and off and specifies delay and rate for repeated characters. It  
also allows you to adjust the keyboard backlight threshold and intensity.  
Manage Triggers  
Allows multiple-scanner trigger management, including the ability to configure each of the  
trigger buttons. You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single- and  
double-click, and the double-click time.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Control Panel Icons  
Network And Dial-up Connections  
Displays a network window from which the Ikôn 802.11g radio can be configured and an  
existing configuration can be executed. Refer to “Configuring The Summit 802.11b/g” on  
page 13 for details.  
Owner  
Provides fields in which you can specify owner information. A Notes menu allows addi-  
tional information to be entered and displayed when the unit is powered up. Network ID  
menu information is used to access network resources. (This information should be provided  
by your System Administrator.)  
Password  
Allows you to assign a password to restrict access to elements of the unit. Once assigned,  
password access cannot be circumvented so it is important that you write down your pass-  
word and keep it in a safe place. Refer to “Security Settings” on page 60 for details.  
PC Connection  
Enables direct connections to a desktop computer. Selecting the Change Connection button  
allows you to change the type of direct connect to your PC.  
Power  
Displays battery pack power status. (Alternately, battery status can be accessed through the  
taskbar.) Additional tabs allow you to determine suspend states, specify a suspend threshold  
and, when seated in either the Combo Dock or Quad Dock, determine whether or not a  
battery that requires it can be recalibrated. This dialog box also allows you to activate card  
slots and built-in devices. (Refer to “Devices” on page 104 for details.)  
RDC Licenses  
The Terminal Services license server stores all license tokens that have been installed for a  
group of terminal servers and tracks licenses issued. The Remote Desktop Licenses (RDC)  
application displays license ‘tokens’ for devices that connect to a Terminal Server.  
Region & Language  
Allows you to specify the local language that is to be displayed on the Ikôn screen along  
with the format of numbers, currency, time and date for your region.  
Remove Programs  
Lists the programs that can be removed from your unit. To remove a program, select it and  
then click on the Remove button.  
80  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Control Panel Icons  
Storage Manager  
Allows the user to view information about the storage devices that are present, such as  
microSD flash cards. For details, see page 135.  
Stylus  
Adjusts how Windows CE 5.0 recognizes your double-tap (as slow or rapid successive taps).  
In the Calibration menu, you can recalibrate your touchscreen by tapping on the Recali-  
brate button and following the directions on the screen.  
System  
Displays system and memory properties. In the Memory menu, you can allocate memory  
between storage memory and program memory.  
Teklogix Scanners  
Provides scanner parameters and the bar code symbologies that the Ikôn scanner will suc-  
cessfully read.  
Teklogix Error Handling Service  
Is an error diagnostic tool that enables you to log error messages to report to Psion Teklogix.  
Teklogix Imagers  
The Teklogix Imagers program is used to read bar codes and capture images.  
Total Recall  
Provides access to a backup and restore utility to maintain applications and settings during a  
cold boot.  
TweakIT Settings  
Allows you to change Advanced System Settings (interface, network, and servers), User  
System Settings (display font size), and provides the Registry Editor.  
Volume & Sounds  
Allows you to adjust the volume of the sound emitted to indicate events like warnings, key  
clicks and screen taps.  
Wireless WAN  
Provides access to technology like GSM/GPRS, which allows wide area networking capa-  
bility such as internet browsing via GSM/GPRS. It also provides access to the Phone API.  
For detailed information, see Appendix B: “Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)”.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Basic Setup  
5.5  
Basic Setup  
5.5.1  
App Launch Keys  
The App Launch Keys icon allows you to map a key to an application so that you can then  
launch the application from a single key-press.  
•
In the Control Panel, choose the App Launch Keys icon.  
Figure 5.2 Choosing The App Launch Keys Icon  
To assign an application key:  
•
Tap the Add button.  
•
Press the key you want to use to launch an application. (If an unsupported key is  
pressed, a message appears on this screen letting you know.)  
82  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5: Configuration  
App Launch Keys  
The cursor moves to the App field and a new screen is displayed where you can choose the  
application to which you want to assign the application key. If you need to, you can Browse  
through the information in your Ikôn until you locate the application you want to launch.  
•
Once you’ve selected the file you want to map, tap on OK.  
The cursor moves to the Data field. You can use this field if you need to define special pa-  
rameters to your application launch key. If you don’t want to assign any parameters, you can  
leave the Data field blank. If, for example, you want to assign an application launch key to  
launch the WordPad application, you can leave this field blank. If you want to assign an ap-  
plication launch key that will open a specific document in the WordPad application, you  
need to browse to and choose that document while the cursor is in the Data field.  
•
Tap on OK.  
•
If you need to Edit, Remove or Add another App Launch Key, you can do it from this  
final screen. Otherwise, tap on OK to save you Application Launch Key.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Display Properties  
•
To launch the application you chose, press the application key you assigned.  
5.5.2  
Display Properties  
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Display icon.  
Figure 5.3 Choosing The Display Icon  
5.5.2.1  
Display Backlight  
The backlight is activated for a configurable amount of time when the Ikôn is in use (key  
press, scanner trigger, or data received from the host). The Display Properties dialog box in  
the Control Panel allows you to specify the intensity of the backlight along with how long  
the display will maintain the specified intensity.  
Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.  
84  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Display Properties  
•
In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Backlight tab.  
Note: Backlight changes take effect immediately. You do not need to reset the unit.  
To maximize battery run time, keep the display backlight brightness and active  
durations as low as possible.  
Intensity  
This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the Ikôn backlight. Sliding the bar to  
the left lowers the light intensity, and sliding it to the right raises the intensity.  
Bright For  
The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the back-  
light stays on at the configured intensity after the last user action (keypress, scan trigger).  
Dim For  
The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the back-  
light stays on at half the configured intensity (dimmed backlight) after expiration of the  
Bright For delay and as long as no user action takes place (such as a keypress or scan trig-  
ger). At the expiration of the Dim For duration, the display backlight shuts off.  
External Power Checkbox  
When you select the checkbox next to When using external power keep the backlight always  
ON, the backlight remains on at the configured intensity when the Ikôn is operating with ex-  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Keyboard Properties  
ternal power (not battery power). If the Ikôn is drawing power from its battery, this option is  
ignored and the other parameters defined in Display Properties dialog box are used.  
5.5.2.2  
Display Appearance  
•
In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Appearance tab.  
This dialog box allows you to customize the display colour scheme.  
5.5.3  
Keyboard Properties  
This icon displays the Keyboard Properties dialog box in which you can adjust the repeat  
rate of the keys, the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the [BLUE]  
and [ORANGE] modifier keys. This dialog box also allows you to define macro keys and  
Unicode characters.  
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Keyboard icon.  
86  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Keyboard Properties  
Figure 5.4 Choosing The Keyboard Icon  
5.5.3.1  
Key Repeat  
Note: These settings apply when a key is held down continuously.  
•
In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Repeat tab.  
Repeat Delay  
The value assigned for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between repeat  
characters. Sliding the Repeat Delay bar to the left increases the delay between key repeats,  
and sliding the bar to the right shortens the repeat delay time.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Keyboard Properties  
Repeat Rate  
The value assigned for the Repeat Rate parameter determines how quickly the key you press  
repeats and is measured in characters per second (cps). Sliding the bar to the left slows the  
repeat rate, and sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat rate.  
Note: Use the field at the bottom of this dialog box to test the repeat delay and rate set-  
tings you’ve chosen.  
5.5.3.2  
Sequence  
This slider determines the allowable pause between alpha key presses on a numeric keypad.  
For example, suppose you want to type the letter ‘c’—you would need to press the [2] key  
three times. With the [ORANGE] key locked ‘on’, if you press [2] twice and then pause  
between key presses for 1 second, the letter ‘b’ will be selected automatically. Moving the  
Sequence slider to the right increases the pause time between alpha key presses.  
88  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Keyboard Properties  
5.5.3.3  
Keyboard Backlight  
•
In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Backlight tab.  
Intensity  
This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the Ikôn keyboard backlight. Sliding  
the bar to the left darkens the keyboard backlight intensity, and sliding it to the right lightens  
the intensity.  
ON For  
The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the key-  
board backlight stays on when a unit is not in use.  
Note: Tapping in the checkbox next to ‘When using external power, keep the backlight  
always ON’ forces the keypad backlight to remain on when the unit is operating  
with external power.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Keyboard Properties  
5.5.3.4  
Keyboard One Shot Modes  
In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the One Shots tab.  
•
The options in this menu allow you to determine how modifier keys on your Ikôn behave.  
For each modifier key—[ALT], [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ORANGE] and [BLUE]—you have the  
following options in the drop-down menu: Lock, OneShot, and OneShot/Lock.  
Note: Keep in mind that checking the taskbar lets you know whether or not these keys are  
locked on. For example, if the [ORANGE] key is locked ‘on’, the taskbar at the bot-  
tom of the screen displays it in uppercase characters, ORANGE KEY. If this key is  
displayed in lowercase characters in the taskbar, you’ll know that the orange key is  
not locked. It will become inactive following a key press.  
Important: Once you’ve assigned a One Shot mode to a modifier key, you need to tap  
on the OK button at the top of the tab to activate your selection.  
Lock  
If you choose Lock from the drop-down menu, pressing a modifier key once locks it ‘on’  
until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off.  
OneShot  
If you choose OneShot, the modifier key remains active only until the next key is pressed.  
90  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Keyboard Properties  
OneShot/Lock  
OneShot/Lock allows you to combine these functions. When you choose this option and you  
press the modifier key once, it remains active only until the next key is pressed.  
If you press the modifier key twice, it is locked ‘on’, remaining active until the modifier key  
is pressed a third time to turn it ‘off’.  
5.5.3.5  
Keyboard Macro Keys  
•
In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Macros tab.  
A macro has 200 programmable characters (or “positions”). The macro keys can be pro-  
grammed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys  
including [ENTER], [BKSP] and [DEL] ([BLUE]-[BKSP]), function keys and arrow keys.  
Recording And Saving A Macro  
On the 28-key Ikôn, you can program a maximum of 6 macro keys.  
•
In the Macro menu highlight a macro key number, for example macro 1, to assign a  
macro to macro key [M1]. Choose the Record button.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Keyboard Properties  
A message screen is displayed instructing you to Enter Key Strokes to Record  
•
•
Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key. You can type text and  
numbers, and you can program the function of special keys into a macro.  
When you’ve finished recording your macro sequence, press the key sequence: [CTRL]  
[ALT] [ENTER], or choose the Stop Recording button.  
A new screen called ‘Verify Macro’ displays the macro sequence you created. The Save  
button is highlighted.  
•
Press [ENTER] to save your macro, or highlight CANCEL and press [ENTER] to  
discard it.  
Executing A Macro  
To execute a macro:  
•
Press the macro key to which you’ve assigned the macro. For example, if you created a  
macro for macro key 1, press [M1] to execute the macro.  
Deleting A Macro  
To delete a macro:  
•
•
In the Macros menu, highlight the macro number you want to delete.  
Choose the Delete button.  
92  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Keyboard Properties  
5.5.3.6  
Unicode Mapping  
In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Unicode Mapping tab.  
•
The Unicode Mapping menu is used to map combinations of virtual key values and [CTRL]  
and [SHIFT] states to Unicode™ values. This menu shows the configured Unicode charac-  
ter along with the Unicode value. For example, the sample screen above shows “a  
(U+0061)” indicating that the character “a” is represented by the Unicode value “0061”, and  
so on. Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexadecimal rather than  
decimal values.  
All user-defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping menu in order of  
virtual key value, and then by order of the shift state. If a Unicode mapping is not listed, the  
Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value.  
Adding And Changing Unicode Values  
Important: Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Keyboard  
Properties dialog box.  
•
Choose the Add/Change button  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
93  
 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Keyboard Properties  
Figure 5.5 Adding And Changing Unicode Values  
•
•
Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list. In the sample screen above, a value will  
be assigned to virtual key 0 (VK 0).  
Position the cursor in the Unicode Mapping field, and type a Unicode value for the  
highlighted key.  
Note: To add a shifted state, [SHIFT] and/or [CTRL], press [TAB] to position the cursor  
in the checkbox next to ‘SHIFT Pressed’ and/or ‘CTRL Pressed’. Press [SPACE] to  
select the shift state you want to assign.  
Removing Unicode Values  
•
In the Unicode Mapping menu, highlight the item you want to delete, and choose the  
Remove button.  
5.5.3.7  
Scancode Remapping  
A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard. Every key has  
a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key, a function or a macro. Scancode Remap-  
ping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard. A key can be  
remapped to send a virtual key (e.g. VK_F represents the ‘F’ key; VK_RETURN represents  
the [ENTER] key, etc.), perform a function (e.g. turn the scanner on, change volume/con-  
trast, etc.) or run a macro.  
There are three different tables of scancode mappings: the Normal table, the Blue table and  
the Orange table. The Normal table defines unmodified key presses; the Blue table defines  
94  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Keyboard Properties  
key presses that occur when the [BLUE] modifier is on; the Orange table defines key  
presses that occur when the [ORANGE] modifier is on. The default mappings of these scan-  
codes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using the Scancode Remapping menu  
accessed from the Keyboard Properties dialog box.  
The first column in the Scancode Remapping menu displays the scancodes in hexadecimal.  
If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key, that virtual key is displayed in the next column  
labelled ‘V-Key’. A virtual key that is ‘Shifted’ or ‘Unshifted’ is displayed in the third  
column labelled ‘Function’.  
If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro, the first and second columns remain  
blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number  
(e.g., Macro 2).  
Adding A Remap  
To add a new remapping:  
•
Choose the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
95  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Keyboard Properties  
The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed.  
•
Type the scan code in hexadecimal in the field labelled Scancode  
Note: The Label field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping.  
Virtual Key, Function And Macro  
The radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scan code  
will be remapped: Virtual Key, Function or Macro.  
When Virtual Key is selected, you can choose to force [SHIFT] to be on or off when the  
virtual key is sent. If No Force is selected, the shift state is dependent on whether the shift  
state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent.  
When Function is selected, a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box.  
When Macro is selected, the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box.  
•
•
Choose Virtual Key, Function or Macro.  
Choose a function from the Function list in the dialog box, and tap on OK.  
Editing A Scancode Remap  
To edit a scancode:  
•
•
•
In the Scancode Remapping menu, tap the stylus on the remap you want to edit.  
Tap on the Edit button, and make the appropriate changes.  
Tap on OK to save your changes.  
96  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Keyboard Properties  
Removing A Remap  
To delete a remap:  
•
In the Scancode Remapping menu, highlight the scancode you want to delete, and tap  
on the Remove button.  
•
Tap on OK.  
5.5.3.8  
Lock Sequence  
The Lock Sequence menu allows you to lock the Ikôn keyboard to prevent keys from being  
pressed accidentally when, for example, the unit is inserted in a holster.  
•
•
•
To lock the keyboard, tap in the checkbox next to Enable key lock sequence.  
Tap in the checkbox next to Keyboard locked at startup.  
In the Key sequence dropdown menu, choose the key sequence you will need to type to  
unlock the keyboard.  
Note: It is useful to leave the ‘Show popup message’ enabled (default) so that anyone  
attempting to use the Ikôn keyboard will see the key sequence they will need to enter  
to unlock the keyboard displayed on the screen.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Volume And Sound Properties  
A locked keyboard icon is displayed in the softkey bar when the keyboard is locked.  
Locked Keyboard  
Icon  
•
Type the key sequence to unlock the keyboard.  
5.5.4  
Volume And Sound Properties  
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Volume & Sounds icon.  
Figure 5.6 Choosing The Volume Icon  
98  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Volume And Sound Properties  
5.5.4.1  
Volume Adjustments  
•
•
Slide the volume button to the left to lower the beeper volume or to the right to increase  
the beeper volume.  
Under the heading Enable sounds for, enable the conditions under which you want the  
Ikôn to emit a beep.  
5.5.4.2  
Sound Adjustments  
This dialogue box allows you to assign sounds to identify a particular actions. For example,  
you can choose the sound your Ikôn will emit when you close a program and choose another  
sound for a failed scan, etc.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Power Management Properties  
5.5.5  
Power Management Properties  
This icon displays a Power Properties dialog box that indicates the unit’s battery capacity  
and allows you to manage battery use.  
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Power icon.  
5.5.5.1  
Battery Capacity  
•
In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Battery tab to view battery details.  
100  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Power Management Properties  
5.5.5.2  
Power Saving Suspend  
•
In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Suspend tab.  
Power Source  
This dialog box allows you to specify the suspend time for either AC Power or  
Battery Power.  
Suspend Timeout  
Important: Psion Teklogix recommends setting the Suspend value to 10 minutes. To  
further reduce power consumption, carefully consider the duration of time  
that the display backlight is ‘on’ (see “Display Backlight” on page 84).  
When the Ikôn is idle—not receiving any user input (a key touch, a scan, and so on) or  
system activity (serial data, an activity initiated by an application, and so on)—the Ikôn uses  
the value assigned in the Suspend Timeout field to determine when the unit will go to sleep  
(appear to be off).  
When the time in the Suspend Timeout field elapses without any activity, the unit enters  
suspend state. In suspend state, the Ikôn CPU enters a sleep state, and the radio is shut off.  
The state of the device (RAM contents) is preserved. Pressing [ENTER] wakes the system  
from suspend state. When the Ikôn is in suspend state, the network connection will not be  
broken immediately. If the connection is dropped, you must re-establish the network  
connection.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Power Management Properties  
5.5.5.3  
Suspend Threshold And Estimated Battery Backup  
The Suspend Threshold adjustment tells the system when to shut down when the battery  
drains. If left at the default value, Maximum Operating Time, the Ikôn will run until the  
battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time. If you  
choose Maximum Backup Time, the Ikôn shuts off with more energy left in the battery so  
RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time.  
Important: Selecting Maximum backup time will reserve approximately 20% of the  
battery capacity for memory backup. Once the battery is drained, the system  
RAM memory is lost and the unit must boot.  
In most real-time transaction environments this is not a problem (it only  
takes a few seconds to boot). Batch transaction environments, where data is  
not saved to a non-volatile memory (such as an SD FLASH card), may  
need to pay particular attention to this parameter. Psion Teklogix does not  
recommend the storage of any valuable data in system RAM.  
The Ikôn Windows CE 5.0 environment does not store any critical data in  
RAM (such as the registry or file system).  
If the user's application does not save data to RAM, Psion Teklogix recom-  
mends keeping the Suspend Threshold setting as low as possible to  
maximize battery run time.  
The Estimated Battery Backup is the amount of battery power that has been reserved or set  
aside to protect data until a charged battery can be installed in the Ikôn. When the battery ca-  
pacity is depleted up to the Estimated Battery Backup reserve specified in the Suspend  
Threshold menu, the Ikôn shuts off automatically and uses the reserve power to preserve the  
102  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Power Management Properties  
data stored on the Ikôn. Once the Ikôn shuts down, it cannot be switched on until a fresh  
battery is installed, or the unit is inserted in a docking station or cradle.  
•
Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the right to increase the battery capacity  
reserved for backup purposes. Data will be preserved to a maximum of 124 hours.  
•
Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the left to decrease the power reserved for  
backup purposes; this increases the Ikôn’s operating time—the amount of time the Ikôn  
will operate before shutting down—but reduces the power reserved for backup purposes  
to a minimum of 24 hours.  
Internal super-capacitors will protect the data stored in the Ikôn while the battery is swapped  
for a fully charged one.  
Important: Once the battery is removed, the super-capacitors will preserve the data  
stored on the Ikôn for approximately 5 minutes. It is critical that you install  
a charged battery before this time elapses.  
5.5.5.4  
Advanced  
Allow Suspend With:  
This menu allows you to specify whether or not your unit will enter Suspend state while it is  
operating with an active PPP connection, network interface or active TCP/IP connection.  
Low Power Warnings  
The sliding scale at the bottom of this menu allows you to specify the remaining battery ca-  
pacity at which a warning message is displayed on the Ikôn screen, from 0% to 20%.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Power Management Properties  
5.5.5.5  
Devices  
This menu controls power to individual CF and SDIO slots, and built-in devices. Enable or  
disable the checkboxes as needed, set WWAN power mode to the value you need, then tap on  
OK to save your changes.  
5.5.5.6  
GPS  
Note: For those who have acquired a GPS program: for configuration, the installed GPS  
radio is on COM 2.  
This option allows you to enable power to the GPS radio, decide how long it is powered up,  
and whether it is on or off during suspend mode.  
104  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Stylus Properties  
5.5.6  
Stylus Properties  
Note: Touchscreen calibration may not be enabled on your unit. If your screen appears to  
require recalibration, contact your supervisor.  
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Stylus icon.  
5.5.6.1  
Double-Tap  
•
In the Double-Tap menu, follow the directions to tailor the sensitivity of the stylus when  
you tap on the touchscreen.  
5.5.6.2  
Calibration  
Touchscreens rarely require recalibration. However, if your touchscreen has never been cal-  
ibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, follow  
the directions below.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Manage Triggers  
•
Choose the Calibration tab, and then tap on the Recalibrate button.  
•
Follow the directions in the Calibration menu to recalibrate the screen.  
Touch  
This menu allows you to disable the touchscreen.  
Choose the Touch tab. Tap the checkbox next to Disable the touch panel.  
5.5.6.3  
5.5.7  
•
Manage Triggers  
This option allows you to configure how bar code scanners and other devices are triggered.  
You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single- and double-click,  
and the double-click time.  
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Manage Triggers icon.  
Figure 5.7 Manage Triggers Icon  
106  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Manage Triggers  
•
In the Manage Triggers screen you’ll see a list of trigger mappings.  
5.5.7.1  
Trigger Mappings  
A trigger mapping is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a driver or  
application, the module(s)—sometimes referred to as “trigger consumer(s)”—of the trigger  
source. Along with keyboard keys, the external trigger (scan button), or software-based.  
When the specified key is pressed, the trigger consumer (for example, a decoded scanner) is  
sent a message.  
Important: It is not possible to have two or more identical mappings—for example [F1]  
cannot be mapped to the Non-Decoded Scanner twice—even if the trigger  
type is different.  
A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer generate key  
data or perform its normal function. For example, if the space button is  
used as a trigger source, it will not be able to send space characters to  
applications.  
Double-Click  
When a key is pressed and released, then pressed again within the configured time (between  
0 to 1000 milliseconds), a double-click occurs. See also “Trigger-Press Type” on page 109.  
Show All Modules  
By default, the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings. Mappings for drivers or  
applications that are not currently active are not normally displayed. By checking this  
checkbox, all mappings, both active and inactive, are displayed.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Manage Triggers  
Add  
Tapping this button brings up the Add Mapping dialog (see “Add And Edit Trigger Map-  
ping” on page 108), so that you can add new trigger mappings.  
Edit  
Tapping this button brings up the Edit Mapping dialog (see “Add And Edit Trigger Map-  
ping” on page 108), so that you can edit existing trigger mappings.  
Remove  
Tapping this button removes an existing mapping.  
OK  
The OK button in the top right of the Manage Triggers screen saves all changes made. If the  
cancel button X is tapped instead, or the [ESC] key is pressed, all changes made will  
be discarded.  
5.5.7.2  
Add And Edit Trigger Mapping  
These dialogs allow the user to add and edit trigger mappings.  
Trigger Key  
This drop-down list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events, such as the Soft  
Scan, Left Scan, etc., for the trigger module selected.  
108  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Manage Triggers  
Note: It is possible to map the same source to different modules (trigger consumers)—for  
example, to both the Imager and Non-Decoded Scanner. If so, both devices/opera-  
tions will occur simultaneously. This is not recommended in most cases, especially  
with devices such as Imagers or RFID Readers.  
It is also possible to map different sources to the same module (trigger con-  
sumer)—for example, two different trigger keys can be mapped to the RFID  
File System.  
Add Key  
Only existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo-box. To add a new source to  
this list, tap on the Add Key button. A dialog will pop up and allow you to select the key-  
board key to use as a trigger source.  
Trigger-Press Type  
You can enable either an Up/Down or Double Click response to a trigger press. Normally,  
when a trigger (keyboard key, etc.) is pressed and released, a “trigger down” event is sent to  
the “owner”—that is, the application receiving the trigger press information—followed by a  
“trigger up”. If Double Click is chosen in this menu, when the trigger is pressed, released,  
and then pressed again, a “double-click” event will have occurred. If a mapping with the  
type Up/Down has also been configured for the same source, it will only receive the first set  
of trigger events.  
Module Trigger  
This identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Certificates  
Show All Modules  
By default, inactive owners are not shown. By checking this checkbox, all owners, both  
active and inactive, are displayed.  
5.5.8  
Certificates  
A public key is transmitted as part of a certificate. The certificates listed in the Certificates  
tabs ensure that the submitted public key is, in fact, the public key that belongs to the sub-  
mitter. The Ikôn checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification  
authority that the Ikôn explicitly trusts. This option is used in conjunction with 802.1x au-  
thentication to enhance Ikôn security.  
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Certificate icon.  
Figure 5.8 Certificates Icon  
Your Ikôn has certificates already preinstalled in the unit. My Certificates establish your  
identity, Other Authorities certificates identify intermediate certification authorities and  
Trusted Authorities certificates establish the identity of the servers with which you  
can connect.  
110  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Bluetooth  
You can import or remove certificates, and view certificate information for any listing, in-  
cluding names, dates, serial numbers, etc.  
5.6  
Bluetooth  
5.6.1  
Bluetooth Setup  
Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended  
for Personal Area Networks (PAN). The technology is based on a short-range radio link that  
operates in the ISM band at 2.4 GHz. Because Bluetooth utilizes a radio-based link, it does  
not require a line-of-sight connection in order to communicate.  
Note: The Bluetooth radio uses an internal antenna.  
The Bluetooth radio is disabled by default. Before you begin the setup process:  
•
•
In the Control Panel, tap on the Power icon.  
Tap on the Devices tab, and tap in the checkbox next to Enable Bluetooth. Tap on OK.  
When the radio is enabled, a Bluetooth icon appears the taskbar at the bottom of the screen.  
It is ready for setup.  
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Bluetooth Device Properties icon to display the  
Bluetooth Manager screen.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Bluetooth Setup  
Figure 5.9 Bluetooth Icon  
The Bluetooth Manager dialog box displays the other Bluetooth devices with which you  
can communicate.  
5.6.1.1  
Devices  
If you intend to pair devices (a headset, for example), power on and bring the devices within  
5 m (16.4 ft.) of the Ikôn before proceeding with the discovery process described below.  
Pairing A Device  
To pair devices:  
•
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to place the device you want to pair in  
pairing mode  
112  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Bluetooth Setup  
•
•
Choose the Devices tab and Scan for devices in your area.  
When the scan is complete, highlight the device you want to pair with and either double-  
click or press the Services button.  
•
If a PIN dialog box appears, type your PIN and tap on OK.  
After entering the device PIN number, the Services dialog appears with a list of services  
available on that device.  
•
To select a service, double-click on the service you want, or highlight the service and  
press the space bar.  
•
In the drop-down list of options available, choose Active to pair the device.  
A COM/BSP port name will appear next to the service for this device. Your device is  
now paired.  
Scan  
•
Click on the Scan button to list available devices.  
Figure 5.10 Available Bluetooth Devices  
Wait for the Ikôn to complete its scan (approximately 20 seconds). When scanning starts, the  
Scan button will change to Stop—if necessary, you can tap on this button to stop the process.  
Once scanning is complete, all discovered devices will be displayed in the list box, with  
Name, Address, Active status, and PIN information.  
Note: During the scanning process, addresses are located first, followed by names. Only  
the names of devices that are within the Bluetooth radio coverage range will  
be retrieved.  
The Active column indicates whether any service is activated for that device. When a service  
is activated, the device is displayed in the list even when it is not detected during the scan.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Bluetooth Setup  
The PIN column indicates whether you have a PIN (password) set for the device.  
At this point you can either query for services or set the PIN for each device. Once you high-  
light a device in the list box, both the Services and Set PIN buttons become available.  
Services  
A discovered device may display several service profiles that it can use to communicate, and  
you will want to activate the type you need. Supported profiles that can be activated include:  
DUN (Dial-Up Networking service), Printer (serial service), Headset service and LANPPP  
(LANAccessUsingPPP service). ASync (ActiveSync) is another available profile.  
•
To start the service scan, highlight a device in the Devices menu list, and then click on  
the Services button or double-click on the device entry.  
Note: If the remote device is out of reach or turned off, it can take a considerable amount  
of time for the Services dialog box to appear—it may appear to be frozen.  
Once the device’s service profiles are displayed in the Services list box:  
•
•
Highlight the service to be activated.  
Press [SPACE] or right-click to display the Activation menu.  
The Activation menu contains four options: Activate, Authenticate, Outgoing, and Encrypt.  
Once the service is successfully activated, the assigned port (if applicable) will appear in the  
Port column of the Services list box. You can choose to use BSP or COM as the port name.  
BSP is the latest Microsoft Bluetooth stack standard, but older applications assume serial  
ports are COM. When using COM as the port name, the Bluetooth manager will try to find  
and use a free port between COM7 and COM9. When using BSP as the port name, BSP2 to  
BSP9 are available for use. The port is available as soon as it is activated.  
Note: The CH column shows the RFCOMM channel of the service if the service is  
RFCOMM-based. This information is not generally needed except for  
debugging purposes.  
To add a service to the Outgoing port, an active service must first be deactivated. Then you  
can choose the Outgoing option from the Activation menu (highlight a service, right-click  
or press the [SPACE] bar to display the Activation menu).  
The Authentication and Encryption options can be changed only before activation. To  
change these after activation, deactivate the service first, then change the options.  
Once a service is activated, all the information regarding the service, including the  
RFCOMM channel number, is saved in the registry. (Some remote devices may change their  
RFCOMM channel numbers when they reboot, so your saved setting may not work when  
114  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Bluetooth Setup  
the remote device is rebooted. In that case, you must deactivate the service and reactivate it  
to detect the current RFCOMM channel.)  
Set PIN  
PINs can be set for each device by pressing the Set PIN button in the Devices menu, or you  
can skip this step and try to connect to the device first.  
Important: The remote device must have authentication enabled, otherwise the PIN  
authentication will fail.  
•
Highlight a device, click on the Set Pin button, and type the PIN.  
You will receive a message, either that the PIN has been successfully validated or that it has  
been rejected.  
If the PIN has been validated, an asterisk (*) appears in the PIN column in the Devices list  
box, indicating that this device has a PIN set. Once a PIN is entered, it is saved in  
the registry.  
To remove the PIN:  
•
Choose Set PIN, and press [ENTER].  
If the Ikôn attempts to connect to a remote device that has Authentication enabled and does  
not have a required PIN set, an Authentication Request dialog box appears.  
•
Enter the PIN, and tap on OK to connect the devices.  
5.6.1.2  
Headset  
The Headset connection is initiated from this menu, and the headset speaker and micro-  
phone volumes can be adjusted here.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Bluetooth Setup  
5.6.1.3  
Servers  
When the Bluetooth connection is initiated from your Ikôn to the remote device, the Ikôn is  
called the ‘client’ and the remote is called the ‘server’. The Servers menu displays the server  
profiles that can be activated in your Ikôn. There is currently one server profile available:  
Serial.  
•
Tap on the checkbox to activate the server, and it will display the associated port name  
beside the server name.  
Once you activate a server profile, it is recommended that the Ikôn be rebooted before you  
try to bond from a server.  
Note: You do not need to reboot if you are deactivating a server.  
5.6.1.4  
Outgoing  
116  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Bluetooth Setup  
Outgoing Port acts as a serial port that can be used to connect to a list of Bluetooth devices  
(one at a time), but you have the freedom to switch on-the-fly.  
The Outgoing Port checkbox allows you to create the Outgoing port. When the port is cre-  
ated, the Outgoing menu lists the port name.  
The Outgoing list dialog box displays a list of services marked as ‘Outgoing’. The * column  
indicates the currently selected service. You can tap on Unselect to reset the current selec-  
tion, or you can tap on Select to make a selection. The Remove button deletes the service  
from the outgoing list.  
The Prompt menu determines the behaviour of the pop-up Selection menu. Choosing  
Everytime causes the Selection menu to be displayed each time an outgoing port is created.  
If you choose Once, the menu is displayed only when a partner service is not selected.  
To display the Selection menu at any time:  
•
Press [CTRL] [ALT] [F1], and switch the partner Bluetooth device.  
If a connection to a partner device already exists, the connection is dropped and another con-  
nection to the newly selected device is created instantly without disrupting the application  
that has opened the outgoing port.  
Note: To add a service to the Outgoing port, an active service must first be deactivated.  
Then you can choose the ‘Outgoing’ option from the Activation menu (highlight a  
service, right-click or press the [SPACE] bar to display the Activation menu).  
5.6.1.5  
Active Conn.  
The Active Conn. menu lists the Name, Address, and Type of the currently active connec-  
tions. The table is periodically updated, but it can take a few seconds before it reflects the  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Bluetooth Setup  
actual list of connections. The Type column of the table shows ‘ACL’ or ‘SCO’. The Con-  
nection list table shows the connections for scanning as well as the service connections.  
Note: You can change the device-name and description of your radio by clicking on the  
System icon in Control Panel, which will open the System Properties dialog box.  
Click on the Device Name tab to access the menu and change your settings. Then  
click on OK.  
Although the name will have changed in the Properties menu in Bluetooth Controls,  
the radio only reads it on boot-up. For the changes to take effect, you must reset the  
Ikôn (for reset instructions, see “Resetting The Ikôn” on page 26).  
5.6.1.6  
Properties  
The Properties menu displays information about your Ikôn, and provides some port options.  
The Device Name field shows the device name of your Ikôn. This name can be changed (see  
the Note on the previous page for details).  
Device Class shows the Class of Device (e.g. desktop, Ikôn), which is always set  
to Handheld.  
Local Bluetooth Address shows the address of your Ikôn radio.  
Port Prefix is used to set the port name to either BSP or COM. When the name is set to BSP,  
BSP2 to BSP9 are available for activated services (including the server). When COM is  
chosen, COM7 to COM9 are available.  
118  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5: Configuration  
The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection  
NQuery Retry (Name Query Retry) governs the number of times the Ikôn will attempt to  
query the names of other Bluetooth devices if the first attempt fails. (When the Ikôn scans  
for other devices, it sometimes fails to scan names.)  
Note: Keep in mind that setting this parameter to a higher value will lengthen the  
scan time.  
5.6.1.7  
Search For  
The Search For menu allows you to specify the services for which the Bluetooth radio  
will scan.  
5.6.2  
The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection  
The following steps describe how to set up an internet data connection using a GSM cellular  
telephone with Bluetooth. The Ikôn communicates via Bluetooth to the cell phone, which  
then accesses a WAN (Wide Area Network) and transfers data using GPRS.  
1. Enable the Dial-Up Networking service in the cell phone.  
2. Make the phone discoverable.  
3. Pair the phone service with the Ikôn Dial-Up Networking service using the  
Bluetooth Manager (for instructions on pairing devices, see “Devices” on  
page 112).  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection  
4. In the Ikôn, set up the internet parameters by choosing the Network And Dial-up  
Connections icon from the Control Panel  
5. Choose the Make New Connection icon.  
120  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection  
6. In the Make New Connection dialog box, choose Dial-Up Connection. Enter a  
name for your GPRS network connection.  
7. Choose the Next button to display the Modem dialog box.  
8. In the drop-down menu labelled Select a modem, choose the name of the modem  
with which you want to connect, and then choose the Configure button to display  
the Device Properties dialog box.  
The Ikôn communicates via Bluetooth to your Bluetooth-equipped cellular telephone  
and retrieves the parameters for the Device Properties dialog box. The Ikôn  
then disconnects.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection  
9. Under the Call Options tab, turn off Cancel the call if not connected within, and  
press [ENTER] to save your changes.  
10. In the Modem dialog box, choose the Next button to display the Phone Number  
dialog box.  
122  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection  
The phone number you enter is network carrier dependent. Once you’ve specified all the  
necessary information, choose the Finish button.  
11. In the Control Panel, choose the Dialing icon.  
12. The values in the Dialing Properties dialog box need to be edited according to your  
network carrier specifications.  
Once you’ve edited this dialog box to reflect your network carrier requirements, press  
[ENTER] to save your changes.  
13. At this point, you’ll need to return to the Control Panel, and choose the Network  
and Dial-up Connections icon.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Total Recall  
14. In the network connection window, the new network configuration, in this case  
GPRS Network is displayed. Tap on the new icon.  
When you tap on your new connection, an onscreen message indicates the status of your  
connection: connected, disconnected, error messages, and so on.  
5.7  
Total Recall  
Total Recall is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to maintain applications and settings  
during a cold boot. This utility is based on a backup and restore concept.  
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Total Recall icon  
124  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Creating A Backup Profile  
5.7.1  
Creating A Backup Profile  
In the drop-down menu, you can choose from four options: Create Backup Profile, View Se-  
lected Profile, Restore Selected Profile and Delete Selected Profile. Keep in mind however  
that until a profile is created, the only available option is Create Backup Profile.  
•
Choose the Next button to begin the process.  
Profile Information  
This dialog box lists the possible storage destinations for the profile file.  
1. To begin, type a name for the profile in the field labelled Profile Name.  
2. Choose the Profile Type you want to create:  
For this device only—creates a backup that is manually restored by the operator.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Creating A Backup Profile  
AutoRestore for this device only—creates a profile that automatically restores itself fol-  
lowing a restart.  
AutoRestore for this and other devices—creates a profile that automatically restores  
after resuming from a restart, but it will not contain the touchscreen calibration coordi-  
nates or the Wireless radio settings.  
3. Finally, choose the Profile Location: \Flash Disk.  
4. Tap on the Next button to display the next dialog box Add Files.  
Add Files  
By default, All Files is selected so that all installed or copied files, database entries, and the  
Registry will be saved. You can, however, limit the backup to databases, and/or the registry  
only. By tapping the checkbox next to these items, you can add or remove a check mark to  
enable or disable the option.  
The Select Files option allows you to select predefined file types.  
•
Remove the check mark next to All Files. You’ll notice the checkbox next to Select  
Files changes , indicating that additional options are available.  
126  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Creating A Backup Profile  
•
Choose this icon  
next to Select Files to view your options.  
Choosing By Individual File displays a pop-up menu where you can tailor the list of files  
you want to back up.  
To add a file to your backup list:  
•
Choose Add Files. Browse to and choose the files you want to add to your list.  
To remove a file from your backup list:  
•
•
Choose Remove Files—a dialog box is displayed listing the files that will be backed up.  
Highlight the item you want to remove from the list, and tap on the Remove button.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Creating A Backup Profile  
Choosing By File Type allows you to select the file types that you want backed up.  
View Selections  
Depending on what you have selected for inclusion in your profile, you can view a list of the  
selected files, databases and/or registry.  
•
Choose the Next button to perform the operation.  
128  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Restoring A Profile  
Perform The Operation  
•
Choose the Backup button to start the process, and create a profile.  
5.7.2  
Restoring A Profile  
To manually restore a profile:  
•
Choose Restore Selected Profile from the drop-down menu, and choose the Profile  
Name displayed in the drop-down menu.  
Note: You can also manually restore an auto restore profile located in flash or a  
storage device.  
5.8  
TweakIT  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
       
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Advanced Interface And Network  
This utility allows you to ‘tweak’ or adjust Advanced system settings (interface, network  
and servers), User settings (font size and docking port message), and provides a  
Registry Editor.  
5.8.1  
Advanced Interface And Network  
AP Density  
This option allows you to determine the signal strength at which the Ikon radio will begin  
searching for a new Access Point (AP): High, Medium or Low. If, for example, this option is  
set to High, the radio will begin searching for a new Access Point while still at a fairly strong  
signal strength. Setting AP Density to Low will cause the radio to wait until the signal  
strength is significantly low before attempting to connect to another Access Point.  
Depending on your site configuration—for example, the shelving, the Access Point cover-  
age, etc.—a higher setting may improve through-put, increase and maintain signal strength,  
and reduce missed transmissions.  
Enable IPv6  
This option allows you to enabled Internet Protocol specification, version 6, that has been  
published to use 128-bit IP address (replacing version 4).  
130  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Advanced Services Settings  
Modem Logging  
When this option is enabled, the Ikôn logs AT commands (e.g., dial-out information, pass-  
word string, etc.) that the administrator can monitor for debugging purposes. Modem  
commands are stored in: \MdmLog.txt.  
Radio Power Management  
When this option is enabled, access points that support it will use Radio Power Management  
guidelines to control the client (Ikôn) radio. Access points determine how often the Ikôn  
radio enters sleep mode when no activity is detected to reduce power consumption on the  
client side. Another benefit is that when Radio Power Management is enabled, even when  
no activity is detected, the access point does not disassociate the Ikôn (client).  
5.8.2  
Advanced Services Settings  
FTP Server  
This option is enabled by default to allow file transfers. Keep in mind that data transfer in  
either direction is restricted to the Temp folder—that is, data are always loaded from the  
FTP Server to the Temp folder and from the Temp folder to the FTP Server.  
If this option is disabled, a warm reset must be performed to accept the change.  
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) Server  
The SNTP Server Name typed in this dialog box is used to synchronize Ikôn time with the  
time server time. A warm reset must be performed once the server name as been entered.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
User Display Settings  
5.8.3  
User Display Settings  
User Font Size  
This option allows you to adjust the size of the font used the Ikôn display: Large, Normal  
or Small.  
5.8.4  
User System Settings  
132  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Registry Editor  
Docking Port Message  
Checking this box blocks the message that normally pops up on the display when the Ikôn  
is docked.  
5.8.5  
Registry Editor  
This option is reserved for senior administrators who have a strong understanding of registry  
keys and values. Careless registry editing can cause irreversible damage to the Ikôn.  
5.9  
Error Reporting  
Error Reporting allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts.  
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel. Tap on the Error Reporting icon.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Teklogix Error Handling Service  
5.10 Teklogix Error Handling Service  
•
Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel. Tap on the Teklogix Error Handling  
Service icon.  
Teklogix Error Handling Service is an error diagnostic tool. Tapping in the checkbox next to  
Enable error reporting enables this service.  
5.10.1 ErrorLogInfo  
•
To log an error, tap on the ErrorLogInfo tab.  
•
Choose an Error Level, and tap on FlushToFile to log the information file.  
134  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
The Storage Manager  
Psion Teklogix personnel can help you retrieve and forward the information file to  
our offices.  
5.11 The Storage Manager  
The Storage Manager allows you to view information about the storage devices present in  
the Ikôn, such as a microSD flash card.  
5.11.1 Formatting A Memory Card  
Formatting a memory card bulk-erases it. Once a card is erased, partitions may be created in  
it, similarly to those on a hard drive. Memory-card devices are normally ‘mounted’ (made  
available to the system) automatically when they are inserted. They must be dismounted  
before they can be formatted.  
To format an entire memory card:  
1. Choose Start> Settings>Control Panel.  
2. In Control Panel, double-click on the Storage Manager icon. The Storage  
Manager menu opens:  
3. Choose the memory card from the drop-down list.  
4. Press the Dismount button to dismount the memory card. All partitions on the card  
will be dismounted.  
5. Press the Format button to format the memory card.  
All partitions and information on the card will be erased during the formatting process.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Creating Partitions  
5.11.2 Creating Partitions  
Once the card is formatted, new partitions can be created in it. The default is to create one  
partition that occupies the whole card, but a card can be divided into more than one partition  
if desired. Each partition appears as a separate folder in Windows Explorer.  
To create new partitions:  
1. Tap the New button next to the Partitions list box. The Create New Partition dialog  
box appears:  
2. Type a name for the partition.  
3. If more than one partition is desired, uncheck the Use All Available Disk Space  
checkbox, then specify the desired number of sectors to be used by the partition:  
Note: The sector size of the card is given on the left-hand side of the Storage  
Properties dialog.  
4. Tap OK. The new partition appears in the Partitions list:  
136  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Partition Management  
The new partition is automatically mounted. This is indicated by an asterisk (*) next to its  
name in the partition list. Any unallocated space on the card is indicated at the left, and addi-  
tional partitions can be created in it.  
5.11.3 Partition Management  
Partitions can be individually dismounted, mounted, deleted, or formatted as well. These  
and additional tasks are available from the Partition Properties dialog:  
To dismount a partition:  
1. Choose the desired partition.  
2. Tap the Properties button. The Partition Properties dialog appears.  
3. Tap the Dismount button. The partition is dismounted. The asterisk disappears next  
to its name in the partitions list.  
To delete a partition:  
1. Select the desired partition.  
2. Tap the Delete button. A warning dialog appears.  
3. Tap the OK button. The partition is deleted.  
To format a partition:  
1. Choose the desired partition.  
2. Tap the Properties button. The Partition Properties dialog appears.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Partition Management  
3. Tap the Dismount button. The partition is dismounted. The asterisk disappears next  
to its name in the partitions list.  
4. Tap the Format button. The Format dialog appears:  
5. Choose your format options. These options include:  
• Version of file system (FAT-16, for devices holding up to 4 GB; or FAT-32, for  
devices containing up to 32 GB).  
• Number of FATs (File-Allocation Tables).  
• Number of entries allowed in the root directory.  
• Cluster size (.5 KB to 64 KB).  
There are also two checkboxes, which govern:  
• Whether to use the transaction-safe FAT file system (TFAT). This file system keeps  
multiple copies of the file-allocation table, changing one while maintaining another  
as a backup.  
• Whether to perform a quick format. Quick formatting removes all reference to data in  
the partition without erasing the actual partition. The partition will be treated as  
empty, and new data will overwrite it.  
6. Tap Start. The partition is formatted.  
To mount a partition:  
1. Choose the desired partition.  
138  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
IPv6 Support  
2. Tap the Properties button. The Partition Properties dialog appears.  
3. Tap the Mount button. The partition is mounted. The asterisk appears next to its  
name in the partitions list.  
The Partition Properties dialog has buttons for additional functions. Partitions can be defrag-  
mented, and their file structure can be scanned.  
5.12 IPv6 Support  
The IPv6 Support icon in the Control Panel allows you to activate IPv6 network support on  
your unit if your network setup requires this. This internet protocol specification (version 6)  
supports 128-bit IP addresses, replacing version 4.  
Figure 5.11 IPv6 Support Icon  
•
Choose the IPv6 Support icon to display the associated dialog box.  
•
Choose the checkbox next to Enable IPv6 Network Support to enable this  
internet protocol.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Teklogix Imagers  
5.13 Teklogix Imagers  
The Teklogix Imagers program is used to read bar codes and capture images. The program  
manages preset groups of settings. It does not manage imager settings individually. Custom  
presets—groups of imager settings—are created, modified, deleted, and selected for use,  
through Teklogix Imagers. For detailed information on these presets, please refer to the  
Psion Teklogix Imaging Services SDK Developers Guide (PN 8100153).  
5.13.1 Configuring The Image Capture Presets  
To configure the image capture presets, open the dialog box as follows:  
•
In Control Panel, select Teklogix Imagers and then click the Imaging tab.  
Figure 5.12 Teklogix Imagers Icon  
140  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring The Image Capture Presets  
The following window opens:  
This window lists all the presets, both the predefined and the custom ones. Presets are iden-  
tified as follows:  
•
•
•
Predefined presets are marked as read-only.  
Custom presets are marked as read and write.  
One preset—either predefined or custom—is marked as active.  
When you have completed all the changes, do one of the following:  
•
•
Click OK to exit and save the changes, or  
Click the Close button to exit without saving the changes.  
5.13.1.1 Selecting A Camera  
If the Ikôn has more than one built-in camera, one camera must be selected for configura-  
tion. The cameras is selected as follows:  
1. Expand the Camera Presets list to view the camera options.  
2. Select a camera.  
5.13.1.2 Setting The Active Preset  
The active preset is used at startup by the demonstration program and by other application  
programs. An application can change the active preset to another preset using Teklogix Im-  
agers. To set the active preset, do the following:  
1. Select a preset.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring The Image Capture Presets  
2. Click Activate.  
5.13.1.3 Viewing A Preset  
To view the parameter settings in a preset, do the following:  
1. Select a preset.  
2. Click View.  
The following window opens:  
3. Expand one of the lists to view the parameter settings.  
4. Click the OK, or the Close, button to exit.  
5.13.1.4 Creating A Custom Preset  
Custom presets are created, modified and deleted through Teklogix Imagers. A new custom  
preset is created by modifying a preset—either a predefined preset or an existing custom  
preset. To create a custom preset do the following:  
1. Select a preset.  
2. Click Add.  
142  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring The Image Capture Presets  
A window similar to the following opens:  
3. Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.  
4. When you have completed all the changes, do one of the following:  
• Click OK to exit and save the changes, or  
• Click the Close button to exit without saving the changes.  
5. The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset is at the end of the list. It is  
marked as read and write.  
5.13.1.5 Modifying A Custom Preset  
The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few  
changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close  
as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value do the following:  
1. Select a preset.  
2. Click Edit.  
The following window opens:  
3. Expand one of the lists to view the parameter settings.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring The Image Capture Presets  
4. Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want  
to change.  
5. For a parameter that can take a range of values:  
i. Select the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click the parameter.  
ii. A dialog box —containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current  
setting—similar to the following opens:  
iii. Type the new value for the parameter into the box.  
6. For a parameter that toggles between two values:  
• Select the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or  
• Double-click the parameter.  
7. When you have completed all the changes, do one of the following:  
• Click OK to exit to the parameter list and save the changes, or  
• Click the Close button to exit to the parameter list without saving the changes.  
8. The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.  
9. When you have completed all the changes, do one of the following:  
• Click OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes, or  
• Click the Close button to exit to the preset list without saving the changes.  
5.13.1.6 Removing A Custom Preset  
To remove a custom preset do the following:  
1. Select a custom preset.  
2. Click Remove.  
144  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets  
The following window opens:  
3. Do one of the following:  
• Click Yes to delete the custom preset and exit to the preset list, or  
• Click No to exit to the preset list without deleting the custom preset.  
5.13.2 Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets  
To configure the bar code decoding camera presets, open the dialog box as follows:  
•
In Control Panel, select Teklogix Imagers and then click the Barcoding tab.  
The following window opens:  
This window lists all the presets, both the predefined and the custom ones. Presets are iden-  
tified as follows:  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets  
•
•
•
Predefined presets are marked as read-only.  
Custom presets are marked as read and write.  
One preset—either predefined or custom—is marked as active.  
When you have completed all the changes, do one of the following:  
•
•
Click OK to exit and save the changes, or  
Click the Close button to exit without saving the changes.  
5.13.2.1 Selecting A Camera  
If the Ikôn has more than one built-in camera, one camera must be selected for configura-  
tion. The cameras is selected as follows:  
1. Expand the Camera Presets list to view the camera options.  
2. Select a camera.  
5.13.2.2 Setting The Active Preset  
The active preset is used at startup by the demonstration program and by other application  
programs. An application can change the active preset to another preset using Teklogix Im-  
agers. To set the active preset, do the following:  
1. Select a preset.  
2. Click Default.  
5.13.2.3 Viewing A Preset  
To view the parameter settings in a preset, do the following:  
1. Select a preset.  
2. Click View.  
146  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets  
The following window opens:  
3. Expand one of the lists to view the parameter settings.  
4. Click the OK or the Close button to exit.  
5.13.2.4 Creating A Custom Preset  
Custom presets are created, modified and deleted through Teklogix Imagers. A new custom  
preset is created by modifying a preset—either a predefined preset or an existing custom  
preset. To create a custom preset do the following:  
1. Select a preset.  
2. Click Add.  
A window similar to the following opens:  
3. Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.  
4. When you have completed all the changes, do one of the following:  
• Click OK to exit and save the changes, or  
• Click the Close button to exit without saving the changes.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets  
5. The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset is at the end of the list. It is  
marked as read and write.  
5.13.2.5 Modifying A Custom Preset  
The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few  
changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close  
as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value do the following:  
1. Select a preset.  
2. Click Edit.  
The following window opens:  
3. Expand one of the lists to view the parameter settings.  
4. Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want  
to change.  
5. For a parameter that can take a range of values:  
i. Select the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click the parameter.  
ii. A dialog box —containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current  
setting—similar to the following opens:  
iii. Type the new value for the parameter into the box.  
148  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Symbology Presets  
6. For a parameter that toggles between two values:  
• Select the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or  
• Double-click the parameter.  
7. When you have completed all the changes, do one of the following:  
• Click OK to exit to the parameter list and save the changes, or  
• Click the Close button to exit to the parameter list without saving the changes.  
8. The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.  
9. When you have completed all the changes, do one of the following:  
• Click OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes, or  
• Click the Close button to exit to the preset list without saving the changes.  
5.13.2.6 Removing A Custom Preset  
To remove a custom preset do the following:  
1. Select a custom preset.  
2. Click Remove.  
The following window opens:  
3. Do one of the following:  
• Click Yes to delete the custom preset and exit to the preset list, or  
• Click No to exit to the preset list without deleting the custom preset.  
5.13.3 Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Symbology Presets  
To configure the bar code decoding symbology presets, open the dialog box as follows:  
•
In Control Panel, select Teklogix Imagers and then click the Barcoding tab.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Symbology Presets  
The following window opens:  
This window lists all the presets, both the predefined and the custom ones. Presets are iden-  
tified as follows:  
•
•
•
Predefined presets are marked as read-only.  
Custom presets are marked as read and write.  
One preset—either predefined or custom—is marked as active.  
When you have completed all the changes, do one of the following:  
•
•
Click OK to exit and save the changes, or  
Click the Close button to exit without saving the changes.  
5.13.3.1 Selecting A Camera  
If the Ikôn has more than one built-in camera, one camera must be selected for configura-  
tion. The cameras is selected as follows:  
1. Expand the Camera Presets list to view the camera options.  
2. Select a camera.  
5.13.3.2 Setting The Active Preset  
The active preset is used at startup by the demonstration program and by any other applica-  
tion program. An application can change the active preset to another preset using Teklogix  
Imagers. To set the active preset, do the following:  
1. Select a preset.  
150  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Symbology Presets  
2. Click Activate.  
5.13.3.3 Viewing A Preset  
To view the parameter settings in a preset, do the following:  
1. Select a preset.  
2. Click View.  
The following window opens:  
3. Expand one of the lists to view the parameter settings.  
4. Click the OK or the Close button to exit.  
5.13.3.4 Creating A Custom Preset  
Custom presets are created, modified and deleted through Teklogix Imagers. A new custom  
preset is created by modifying a preset—either a predefined preset or an existing custom  
preset. To create a custom preset do the following:  
1. Select a preset.  
2. Click Add.  
A window similar to the following opens:  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Symbology Presets  
3. Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box.  
4. When you have completed all the changes, do one of the following:  
• Click OK to exit and save the changes, or  
• Click the Close button to exit without saving the changes.  
5. The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset is at the end of the list. It is  
marked as read and write.  
5.13.3.5 Modifying A Custom Preset  
Warning: None of the changes made to a bar code symbology custom preset has any  
effect on the symbologies configured by the Teklogix Scanners program in  
Control Panel.  
The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few  
changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close  
as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a bar code decoding parameter value  
do the following:  
1. Select a preset.  
2. Click Edit.  
The following window opens:  
3. Expand one of the lists to view the parameter settings.  
4. Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want  
to change.  
5. For a parameter that can take a range of values:  
152  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Symbology Presets  
i. Select the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click the parameter.  
ii. A dialog box —containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current  
setting—similar to the following opens:  
iii. Type the new value for the parameter into the box.  
6. For a parameter that toggles between two values:  
• Select the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or  
• Double-click the parameter.  
7. When you have completed all the changes, do one of the following:  
• Click OK to exit to the parameter list and save the changes, or  
• Click the Close button to exit to the parameter list without saving the changes.  
8. The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.  
9. When you have completed all the changes, do one of the following:  
• Click OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes, or  
• Click the Close button to exit to the preset list without saving the changes.  
5.13.3.6 Removing A Custom Preset  
To remove a custom preset do the following:  
1. Select a custom preset.  
2. Click Remove.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Manipulating Bar Code Data  
The following window opens:  
3. Do one of the following:  
• Click Yes to delete the custom preset and exit to the preset list, or  
• Click No to exit to the preset list without deleting the custom preset.  
5.13.3.7 Working With The My Default Preset  
The My Default symbology preset is synchronized with the symbologies defined by the  
Teklogix Scanners program in Control Panel.  
Configuring symbologies in the Teklogix Scanners Control Panel program  
When a symbology is enabled or configured using the Teklogix Scanners program, the  
changes are also made in the My Default preset. My Default automatically becomes the  
active bar code symbology preset.  
None of the other bar code decoding predefined presets is changed.  
Configuring symbologies in the My Default preset  
When My Default is the active preset  
In this case the changes to the symbology configuration are also made in the Teklogix  
Scanners program.  
When My Default is not the active preset  
In this case the changes to the symbology configuration are not made in the Teklogix  
Scanners program.  
5.13.4 Manipulating Bar Code Data  
To configure the rules for manipulating bar code data, open the dialog box as follows:  
•
In Control Panel, select Teklogix Imagers and then click the Filter tab.  
154  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Manipulating Bar Code Data  
The following window opens:  
5.13.4.1 Modifying A Bar Code Setting  
The rules for manipulating data from selected bar code symbologies can be modified. To  
change the settings for a symbology do the following:  
1. Expand the selected bar code symbology to view the parameter settings.  
A list similar to the following is displayed:  
2. For a parameter that can take a range of values:  
i. Select the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click the parameter.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring Translation Rules  
ii. A dialog box —containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current  
setting—similar to the following opens:  
iii. Type the new value for the parameter into the box.  
3. For a parameter that takes a single character:  
i. Select the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click the parameter.  
ii. The following dialog box opens:  
iii. Press the selected key on the keyboard.  
4. When you have completed all the changes, do one of the following:  
• Click OK to exit to the Control Panel and save the changes, or  
• Click the Close button to exit to the Control Panel without saving the changes.  
5.13.5 Configuring Translation Rules  
Translation rules enable the automatic processing of bar code data. Up to 10 cases can be de-  
fined, each consisting of up to 10 sequential rules.  
Note: Changes made to the translations configuration using the Teklogix Scanner pro-  
gram in Control Panel are synchronized with changes made here. Changes made in  
either place affect both translations tables.  
To configure translation rules open the dialog box as follows:  
•
In Control Panel, select Teklogix Imagers and then click the Translations tab.  
156  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Obtaining Information On the Imaging System  
The following window opens:  
For instructions on adding, editing, and removing translation rules, refer to “Translations”  
on page 206.  
5.13.6 Obtaining Information On the Imaging System  
To obtain information on the imaging system, open the dialog box as follows:  
•
In Control Panel, select Teklogix Imagers and then click the About tab.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring File Locations For Captured Images  
The following window opens:  
This window displays the following:  
•
•
•
The imager model.  
The version number of the imaging driver installed on the Ikôn.  
The version number of the firmware installed on the imager.  
To close the window either click OK, or click the Close button.  
5.13.7 Configuring File Locations For Captured Images  
To configure the location for saved images, open the dialog box as follows:  
•
In Control Panel, select Teklogix Imagers and then click the Advanced tab.  
158  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring File Locations For Captured Images  
The following window opens:  
To define the location for saving imager files:  
•
Click File Location. The following window opens:  
•
•
Select the folder name and the file type. Enter the file name.  
When you have completed all the changes, do one of the following:  
- Click OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes, or  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Configuring Triggers  
- Click the Close button to exit to the preset list without saving the changes.  
5.13.8 Configuring Triggers  
5.13.8.1 Viewing The Trigger Configuration  
The scan button on the Ikôn is configured using the Manage Triggers program in Control  
Panel. The Teklogix Imagers program has a shortcut to Manage Triggers. To navigate to this  
shortcut open the dialog box as follows:  
1. In Control Panel, select Teklogix Imagers and then click the Advanced tab.  
The following window opens:  
2. Click Trigger Control...  
160  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Scanner Settings  
The following Manage Triggers window opens displaying the triggers that are available  
to imaging applications:  
3. To view all the triggers and the hardware devices that are configured to use them,  
select Show all modules.  
5.13.8.2 Adding, Editing, And Removing Triggers  
For instruction on adding, editing, and removing triggers, refer to “Manage Triggers” on  
page 106.  
5.14 Scanner Settings  
The Teklogix Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides dialog boxes in which you can  
tailor bar code options and choose the bar codes your scanner will recognize. The parame-  
ters are preset with the default settings of the decoded scanner installed in the unit.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Bar Codes  
Scanner  
Figure 5.13 Teklogix Scanners Icon  
For a listing of available scanners and their specifications, please refer to Chapter 7:  
“Specifications”.  
5.14.1 Bar Codes  
5.14.1.1 Scanner  
The drop-down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose from one of  
the following scanner types used with your Ikôn: Decoded (internal), Decoded (HHP),  
Decoded (ISCP), and Imager.  
The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes  
it supports.  
162  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Bar Codes  
Restoring Default Settings  
Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable only those codes that  
are required by the application.  
Keep in mind that some bar code types are only available when an internal imaging scanner  
is installed. All internal scanners can be configured using the Barcode dialog boxes.  
5.14.1.2 Restoring Default Settings  
If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes, the defaults can be applied  
to a selected parameter, sub-tree of parameters or all scanner parameters.  
•
Press and hold the stylus on a symbology (e.g., Code 128) to display a pop up a menu.  
•
Choose Default subtree to reset only the parameters in the symbology you selected, or  
choose Default all settings to reset all scanner parameters to default settings.  
To reset a single parameter to its default setting:  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
Options  
•
Press and hold the stylus on the parameter you want to reset.  
•
Choose Default parameter to reset the parameter to the default setting.  
5.14.2 Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
•
Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Decoded (internal).  
5.14.2.1 Options  
Note: Some options are available only for specific scanners. Refer to the option names in  
this section for scanner model identification.  
164  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options  
Dot Time (msec)  
The value selected for “Dot Time (msec)” determines (in milliseconds) how long the target-  
ing dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. When you double-  
tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value of 0 msec,  
200 msec or 400 msec. A value of 0 (zero) disables the target dot.  
Aim Duration  
This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser  
begins sweeping. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which  
you can enter a value from 0 to 30 (0 to 3 sec.). A value of 0 (zero) disables the aiming-dot.  
Laser On Time  
The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the  
scan button or trigger is pressed. Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in  
which you can enter a value between 5 and 99, each number representing 0.1 seconds.  
5.14.2.2 Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options  
Continuous Scan Mode  
Setting this parameter to on keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the  
scanner button is pressed and held down.  
Minimum Cancel Time  
The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned  
off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount  
of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly  
triggers on/off.  
Low Power Timeout  
To extend laser life, you can select the time the scanner remains active following a success-  
ful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned—a  
successful decode restores normal blinking.  
This is only used if the unit’s Trigger Mode has been changed to Continuous On. If the Ikôn  
is used in a fixed mount this parameter might be used, but not if the unit is used as a PDA.  
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a  
value of 30 sec., 1 min., 2 min., or 3 min.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
Parameter Scanning  
Setting this parameter to on enables decoding of parameter bar codes.  
Linear Security Level  
This parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your bar code quality.  
There are four levels of decode security for linear code types (e.g., Code 39, Interleaved 2 of  
5). Higher security levels should be selected for decreasing levels of bar code quality. As se-  
curity levels increase, the scanner’s decode speed decreases.  
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from  
1 to 4.  
Linear security level 1 specifies that the following code types must be successfully read  
twice before being decoded:  
Code Type  
Codabar  
Length  
All  
MSI Plessey  
D 5 of 5  
4 or less  
8 or less  
8 or less  
I 2 of 5  
Linear security level 2 specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read twice  
before being decoded.  
Linear security level 3 specifies that code types other than the following must be success-  
fully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read three times:  
Code Type  
MSI Plessey  
D 2 of 5  
Length  
4 or less  
8 or less  
8 or less  
I 2 of 5  
Linear security level 4 requires that all code types be successfully read three times before  
being decoded.  
Bi-Direction Redundancy  
Note: This parameter is only valid if a” Linear Security Level” is enabled.  
166  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options  
When this parameter is enabled, a bar code must be successfully scanned in both directions  
(forward and reverse) before being decoded.  
5.14.2.3 Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options  
Scanning Mode  
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose  
one of the following scanning modes: Smart Raster, Always Raster, Programmable Raster,  
Slab Pattern, Cyclone Pattern, or Semi-Omni Pattern.  
Raster Height And Raster Expand Rate  
These parameters determine the laser pattern’s height and rate of expansion.  
Note: These parameters are only used when either Programmable Raster or  
Always Raster is assigned to the “2D Scanning Mode” parameter. “2D Raster  
Height” and “2D Raster Expand Rate” are intended for very specific applications  
and are usually not required for normal scanning purposes.  
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from  
1 to 15.  
5.14.2.4 Decoded (Internal) Data Options  
Transmit Code ID Char  
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character  
prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the  
decoded symbol.  
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a  
transmit code: None, AIM, or Symbol.  
Scan Data Format  
This parameter allows you to change the scan data transmission format. Double-tapping on  
Scan Data Format displays the following options from which you can choose a data  
format: data (as-is), data [S1], data [S2], data [S1][S2], [P] data, [P] data [S1],  
[P] data [S2], and [P] data [S1][S2].  
Prefix [P], Suffix [S1] And Suffix [S2]  
A prefix and/or one or two suffixes may be appended to scan data for use in data editing.  
When you double-tap on these parameters, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter  
a value from 0 to 255.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
Code 39  
Delete Char Set ECIs  
Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to delete any escape sequences representing  
Character Set ECIs—Extended Channel Interpretations (also known as GLIs)—from its  
buffer before transmission.  
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from PDF417 and MicroPDF417  
bar codes containing Character Set ECIs, even when the ECI Protocol is disabled.  
ECI Decoder  
Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to interpret any Extended Channel Interpre-  
tations (ECIs) supported by the scanner. This parameter has no effect on symbols that were  
not encoded using ECIs.  
If this parameter is set to OFF and a symbol that was encoded using an ECI escape is  
scanned, the scanner transmits the ECI escape followed by the data that was not interpreted.  
5.14.2.5 Code 39  
Enabled  
Setting this parameter to on enables “Code 39”.  
Enable Trioptic Code 39  
Note: “Trioptic Code 39” and “Full ASCII” should not be enabled simultaneously. The  
scanner does not automatically discriminate between these two symbologies.  
Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters. Setting this parameter to on allows  
this type of symbology to be recognized.  
Convert To Code 32  
Note: “Code 39” must be enabled in order for this parameter to function.  
Setting this parameter to on allows the scanner to convert the bar code from “Code 39” to  
“Code 32”.  
Code 32 Prefix  
Note: “Convert to Code 32” must be enabled in order for this parameter to function.  
168  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
When this parameter is enabled, the prefix character “A” is added to all “Code 32”  
bar codes.  
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2  
Lengths for “Code 39” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length  
or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human  
readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where  
you can define the code length that will be decoded by your scanner  
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected  
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two  
selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified  
range from 1 to 55.  
Check Digit Verification  
When this parameter is enabled, the integrity of a “Code 39” symbol is checked to ensure  
that it complies with specified algorithms.  
Note: Only those “Code 39” symbols that include a Mod 43 check digit are decoded when  
this parameter is enabled.  
Transmit Check Digit  
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must to enabled.  
Full ASCII  
If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The  
combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent  
ASCII character.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
Decode Performance  
If this parameter is enabled, one of three decode levels can be chosen in the Decode Perfor-  
mance Level parameter.  
Decode Perf. Level  
This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or “aggressiveness” for Code  
39 symbols. Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code ori-  
entation—this is useful when scanning very long and/or truncated bar codes. Keep in mind  
that increased levels reduce decode security.  
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a  
decode performance level of between 1 and 3.  
Field Size/Chars  
Field Size  
The field size is the length of the field after the first character is stripped and the prefix and  
suffix characters are added. If the field size is non-zero, only bar codes of that length are  
passed through.  
Prefix Char  
This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key  
you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key  
value of the keypress is displayed.  
Suffix Char  
This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key you  
want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key value of  
the keypress is displayed.  
Strip Leading  
This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the begin-  
ning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.  
Note: For Code 39 bar codes, the “AIAG Strip” is performed before the “Strip Leading”.  
Strip Trailing  
The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be  
removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.  
170  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
Code 128  
5.14.2.6 Code 128  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 128”.  
Enable GS1-128/GS1 US  
Previously UPC/EAN and UCC, these types of bar codes include group separators and  
start codes.  
Enable ISBT 128  
To successfully scan this variation, “Enable ISBT 128” must be set to on.  
Decode Performance  
If this parameter is set to on, one of three decode levels assigned to the Decode Performance  
Level parameter can be selected.  
Decode Perf. Level  
This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or “aggressiveness” for Code  
128 symbols. Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code ori-  
entation—this is useful when scanning very long and/or truncated bar codes. Keep in mind  
that increased levels reduce decode security.  
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a  
decode performance level of between 1 and 3.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to page 170 for details.  
5.14.2.7 EAN 13  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.  
Prefix/Suffix  
Prefix Char  
This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key  
you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key  
value of the keypress is displayed.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
EAN 8  
Suffix Char  
This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key you  
want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key value of  
the keypress is displayed.  
Strip Leading  
This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the begin-  
ning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.  
Note: The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character. For example, if  
[BKSP] is pressed, the usual action for that key is performed.  
Strip Trailing  
The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be  
removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.  
5.14.2.8 EAN 8  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.  
EAN-8 Zero Extend  
When this parameter is enabled, five leading zeros are added to decoded EAN-8 symbols,  
making them compatible in format to EAN-13 symbols. Disabling this parameter returns  
EAN-8 symbols to their normal format.  
Prefix/Suffix  
See “Prefix/Suffix” on page 171.  
5.14.2.9 UPC A  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC A”.  
UPC-A, Check Digit  
If you enable this parameter, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.  
UPC-A, Preamble  
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed where you can choose one  
of three options for lead-in characters for UPC-A symbols transmitted to the host device:  
172  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
UPC E  
System Char—system character transmitted with the data,  
Country Code and System Char—both the country code (“0” for USA) and system  
character are transmitted with the data, or  
None—no preamble is transmitted. The lead-in characters are considered part of  
the symbol.  
Prefix/Suffix  
See “Prefix/Suffix” on page 171.  
5.14.2.10 UPC E  
Enabled UPC-E  
Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC E” bar code scans.  
Enabled UPC-E1  
Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.  
UPC-E And UPC-E1 Check Digit  
If you enable one or both of these parameters, a check digit is included with the decoded bar  
code data.  
UPC-E And UPC-E1 Preamble  
When you double-tap on one of these parameters, a dialog box is displayed where you can  
choose one of three options for lead-in characters for UPC-E and UPC-E1 symbols transmit-  
ted to the host device:  
System Char—system character transmitted with the data,  
Country code and System Char—both the country code (“0” for USA) and system char-  
acter are transmitted with the data, or  
None—no preamble is transmitted. The lead-in characters are considered part of  
the symbol.  
Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A  
This parameter converts UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before  
transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A pro-  
gramming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
UPC/EAN Shared Settings  
Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A  
This parameter converts UPC-E1 (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before  
transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A pro-  
gramming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).  
Prefix/Suffix  
Refer to “Prefix/Suffix” on page 171.  
5.14.2.11 UPC/EAN Shared Settings  
The parameters you set here are a shared across all available UPC and EAN bar codes.  
Enable Bookland EAN  
Setting this parameter to on allows your scanner to recognize Bookland EAN bar codes.  
Supplementals  
Supplementals are additionally appended characters (2 or 5).  
Double-tapping this parameter displays a list of options. If Ignore is chosen, UPC/EAN is  
decoded and the supplemental characters are ignored. If Decode is chosen, UPC/EAN  
symbols are decoded with supplementals. Autodiscriminate works in conjunction with the  
Supp. Redundancy parameter.  
Supp. Redundancy  
With “Autodiscriminate” selected in the Supplementals parameter, Supp. Redundancy  
adjusts the number of times a symbol without supplementals is decoded before transmission.  
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog is displayed in which you can enter a value  
between 2 and 20. A value of 5 or above is recommended when Autodiscriminate is selected  
and you are decoding a mix of UPC/EAN symbols with and without supplementals.  
Security Level  
This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge UPC/EAN bar codes.  
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose a level  
from 0 to 3. Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but they also increase the  
time it takes to decode the bar code.  
Linear Decode  
Linear Decode applies to code types containing two adjacent blocks (e.g., UPC-A, EAN-8,  
EAN-13). When enabled, a bar code is transmitted only when both the left and right blocks  
174  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
Code 93  
are successfully decoded within one laser scan. This option should be enabled when bar  
codes are in proximity to each other.  
2D UPC Half Block Stitching  
Setting this parameter to on enables “UPC Half Block Stitching” for the omnidirectional  
scanner engine only.  
5.14.2.12 Code 93  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 93”, or OFF to disable it.  
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2  
Lengths for “Code 93” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length  
or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human  
readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where  
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.  
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected  
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two  
selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified  
range from 4 to 55.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to page 170 for details.  
5.14.2.13 Codabar  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codabar”.  
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2  
Lengths for “Codabar” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete  
length, or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters  
(i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where  
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
MSI Plessey  
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected  
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two  
selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified  
range from 5 to 55.  
CLSI Editing  
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters and inserts a space after the  
first, fifth, and tenth characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol.  
Note: Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.  
NOTIS Editing  
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters from decoded  
Codabar symbol.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.2.14 MSI Plessey  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “MSI Plessey”.  
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2  
Lengths for “MSI Plessey” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete  
length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e.,  
human readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where  
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.  
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected  
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two  
selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified  
range from 6 to 55.  
Check Digits  
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose One or  
Two check digit(s).  
176  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
Interleaved 2 of 5  
If this parameter is set to One, it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit. If “Check  
Digits” is set to Two, it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits.  
Note: If Two check digits is selected, an MSI Plessey “Check Digit Algorithm: must also  
be selected. See below for details.  
Transmit Check Digit  
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the bar code data.  
Check Digit Algorithm  
When the Two MSI Plessey check digits option is selected, an additional verification is re-  
quired to ensure integrity. Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box n which  
you can choose the algorithm to be used: MOD 10/MOD 11 or MOD 10/MOD 10.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.2.15 Interleaved 2 of 5  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.  
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2  
Lengths for “Interleaved 2 of 5” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One dis-  
crete length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters  
(i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where  
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.  
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected  
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two  
selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified  
range from 4 to 14.  
Check Digit Verification  
When enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of an I 2 of 5 symbol to ensure it complies  
with a specified algorithm—either USS (Uniform Symbology Specification) or  
OPCC (Optical Product Code Council).  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
Discrete 2 of 5  
Transmit Check Digit  
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the bar code data.  
Convert To EAN 13  
If this parameter is enabled, the I 2 of 5 bar code is converted to EAN 13.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.2.16 Discrete 2 of 5  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.  
Set Length L1 And Set Length L2  
Lengths for “Discrete 2 of 5” can be set for Any length, Length within a range, One discrete  
length or Two discrete lengths. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e.,  
human readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where  
you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.  
Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected  
length. Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two  
selected lengths. Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified  
range from 1 to 12.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.2.17 RSS Code  
Enable  
Setting this parameter to on enables “2D RSS Code” scanning capability.  
Enable RSS-14 (Reduced Space Symbology)  
RSS-14 code can be either purely linear or split in half with one half stacked on top of the  
other half. Stacking the code reduces the bar code length, and providing the nominal height  
of the code is maintained, it can be omni-directionally scanned.  
178  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
Composite  
Enable RSS Limited  
“RSS-Limited” is restricted, in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs (global trade item  
number) that begin with either a 0 or a 1. It is not stackable and is not designed to be read  
omni-directionally.  
Enable RSS Expanded  
“RSS Expanded” uses the same application identifiers as UCC/EAN-128 codes but it can be  
split into sections and stacked several rows high, reducing the length of the symbol, while  
increasing the capacity of data that can be stored. “RSS Expanded” code can be omni-  
directionally scanned.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.2.18 Composite  
Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies  
included in a composite bar code must be enabled. In addition, “Center Bar  
Code Only” must be disabled.  
A composite symbol includes multi-row 2D components making it compatible with linear  
and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners.  
The options available for this parameter represent multi-level components of a  
composite symbol.  
Enable CC-C And Enable CC-AB  
To activate these components, set these parameters to on.  
Enable TLC-39  
This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code. Setting this pa-  
rameter to on enables this parameter.  
5.14.2.19 PDF-417  
Enable  
Setting this parameter to on enables PDF-417 two dimensional (2D) coding.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (Internal) Scanners  
Micro PDF-417  
5.14.2.20 Micro PDF-417  
Enable  
Setting this parameter to on enables “Micro PDF-417” bar code scanning. Micro PDF-417  
is a multi-row symbology that is useful for applications requiring greater area efficiency but  
lower data capacity than PDF-417.  
Code 128 Emulation  
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF-417  
symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols.  
If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, the following Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted  
with one of the following prefixes:  
]C1 if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915  
]C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909  
]C0 if the first codeword is 910 or 911  
If Code 128 Emulation is set to off, the Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of  
the following prefixes:  
]L3 if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915  
]L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909  
]L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
180  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (ISCP)  
Decoded (ISCP) Options  
5.14.3 Decoded (ISCP)  
•
Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Decoded (ISCP).  
5.14.3.1 Decoded (ISCP) Options  
Laser On Time  
The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the  
scan button or trigger is pressed.  
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value  
between 1 and 10 seconds.  
5.14.3.2 Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options  
Continuous Scan Mode  
Setting this parameter to on keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the  
scanner button is pressed and held down.  
Minimum Cancel Time  
The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned  
off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount  
of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly  
triggers on/off.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (ISCP)  
Code 39  
Low Power Timeout  
To extend laser life, you can select the length of time the scanner remains active following a  
successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned—a  
successful decode restores normal blinking.  
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a  
value of 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, or 3 min.  
Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and  
the Ikôn is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low Power Timeout’ is not used.  
Parameter Scanning  
Setting this parameter to Enabled allows decoding of parameter bar codes.  
Same Read Validate  
The data is only transmitted after repeated reads give the same result. The value assigned at  
this parameter determines the number of reads required, from 0 to 10 times.  
Same Read Timeout  
Prevents the same bar code from being read more than once. The value assigned determines  
after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec.  
Diff Read Timeout  
Prevents unwanted reading of other bar codes on the same label. The value assigned deter-  
mines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec.  
5.14.3.3 Code 39  
Enable  
Setting this parameter to on enables “Code 39”.  
Full ASCII  
If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The  
combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent  
ASCII character.  
Reading Range  
Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The  
default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance.  
182  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (ISCP)  
Code 128  
Start/Stop Transmit  
Setting this parameter to on enables the transmission of start and stop characters, which are  
usually not transmitted. Code 39 can start and end with either a * or a $ character (see also  
the next parameter).  
Accepted Start Char  
This parameter allows the user the option of using one of the two start/stop characters or  
both ($ char, * char, $ and * char).  
Check Digit Verification  
Uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the  
symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not  
transmitted. The available options are: Disabled, MOD 43 Check, French CIP, or  
Italian CIP.  
Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing  
7 characters.  
Italian CIP (Italian pharmaceutical) is also known as Code 32. It is transmitted as a  
standard Code 39 if checksum is not validated.  
Transmit Check Digit  
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.  
Minimum Length  
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to  
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.3.4 Code 128  
Enable  
Setting this parameter to on enables “Code 128”.  
GS1-128  
“GS1-128” is the GS1 implementation of the Code 128 barcode specification. The former  
correct name was UCC/EAN-128.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (ISCP)  
GS1-128 Identifier  
“GS1-128 Identifier” allows the AIM ID " ]C1" for EAN 128 to be transmitted or removed.  
By default, this identifier is transmitted if EAN 128 is enabled.  
GTIN Compliant  
GTIN (global trade item number) processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14-character  
EAN/UCC GTIN. To use GTIN processing, you must activate the EAN 128 symbology.  
Important: When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated, it is not possible  
to read normal EAN 128 Codes.  
FNC1 Conversion  
“FNC1 Conversion” allows the FNC1 character to be converted to another character for ap-  
plications that cannot use the default <GS> Group Separator or hex (1d).  
Double-tapping on this option displays a dialog box listing the allowable range: 0 to 255.  
Enable ISBT 128  
To successfully scan this type of bar code (International Society of Blood Transfusion), this  
option must be set to on. If you enable this type of bar code, Code 128/EAN 128 is deacti-  
vated to avoid any confusion.  
ISBT Concat Transmit  
The codes are not concatenated by default. You need to choose one of the options provided  
for this parameter to send concatenated code. Choosing Only Concatenated Codes transmits  
only concatenated codes—single codes will not be transmitted. Choosing Concatenated or  
Single transmits single codes or concatenated codes. If only one code of a pair is read, that  
code will be transmitted as a single code. If both codes in a pair are detected, they will be  
concatenated provided that “ISBT Concat Any Pair” (see below) is enabled.  
ISBT Concat Any Pair  
Enabling this parameter causes all code pairs that can be, to be concatenated even if they do  
not comply with Section 4.1 of the “ISBT 128 Bar Code Symbology and Application Speci-  
fication for Labeling of Whole Blood and Blood Components” (June 2000, Version 1.2.1).  
Reading Range  
Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The  
default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance.  
184  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (ISCP)  
EAN 13 Settings  
Check Digit Verification  
The available options for this parameter are Disabled or French CIP. This parameter uses  
the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data  
before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted.  
Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing  
7 characters.  
Minimum Length  
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to  
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.3.5 EAN 13 Settings  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.  
ISBN Conversion  
When this parameter (International Standard Book Number) is enabled, the first 3 characters  
(‘978’) are ignored and the checksum (0.9, ‘X’) is calculated on the remaining characters.  
Transmit Check Digit  
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.  
Prefix/Suffix  
Refer to “Prefix/Suffix” on page 171.  
5.14.3.6 EAN 8  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.  
Transmit Check Digit  
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (ISCP)  
UPC A Settings  
Convert To EAN 13  
If this parameter is enabled, an EAN 8 bar code is converted to EAN 13.  
Prefix/Suffix  
Refer to “Prefix/Suffix” on page 171.  
5.14.3.7 UPC A Settings  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC A” bar code scanning recognition.  
Transmit Check Digit  
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.  
Transmit Number System  
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar  
code data.  
Convert To EAN 13  
If this parameter is enabled, a UPC A bar code is converted to EAN 13.  
Prefix/Suffix  
Refer to“Prefix/Suffix” on page 171.  
5.14.3.8 UPC E Settings  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC E”.  
Enable UPC-E1  
Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.  
Transmit Check Digit  
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.  
Transmit Number System  
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar  
code data.  
186  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (ISCP)  
UPC/EAN Shared Settings  
Convert To UPC-A  
This parameter converts UPC E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC A format before  
transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A pro-  
gramming selections (e.g. Check Digit).  
Prefix/Suffix  
Refer to “Prefix/Suffix” on page 171.  
5.14.3.9 UPC/EAN Shared Settings  
The setting assigned to the “Addendum” parameter associated with this option is shared  
across all UPC and EAN bar codes.  
Addendum  
An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter  
provides two options: Not Required but Transmitted if Read or Required and Transmitted.  
•
•
Double-tap on Addendum to display a dialog box listing your options.  
Highlight an item, and tap on OK.  
When “Addendum” is set to Not Required but Transmitted if Read, the scanner searches for  
an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to  
Required and Transmitted, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without  
an addendum.  
Addendum Add-on 2 And Addendum Add-on 5  
Enabling these parameters sets the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or  
5 characters.  
GTIN Compliant  
GTIN (global trade item number) processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14-character  
EAN/UCC GTIN. To use GTIN processing, you must activate the EAN 128 symbology.  
Important: When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated, it is not possible  
to read normal EAN 128 Codes.  
Reading Range  
This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully  
scanned. The default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (ISCP)  
Code 93  
5.14.3.10 Code 93  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 93”.  
Minimum Length  
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to  
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.3.11 Codabar  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codabar”.  
Start/Stop Transmit  
Codabar can use the following sets of characters as start and stop characters:  
a, b, c, d  
A, B, C, D  
a, b, c, d, /, t, n, *, e  
DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4  
Thus, when a set is chosen, the first and last digits of a Codabar message must be one of  
those characters and the body of the message should not contain these characters. Setting  
this parameter to Not Transmitted strips the start and stop characters from this bar code.  
CLSI Library System  
When enabled, spaces are inserted after characters 1, 5, 10 in the 14-character label (used in  
the USA by libraries using the CLSI system).  
Check Digit Verification  
When enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of a symbol to ensure it complies with a  
specified algorithm—either USS (Uniform Symbology Specification) or OPCC (Optical  
Product Code Council).  
Transmit Check Digit  
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.  
188  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (ISCP)  
MSI Plessey  
Set Length L1, Set Length L2, And Set Length L3  
Lengths for “Codabar” can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the number of  
characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code  
length that will be recognized by your scanner.  
Length Mode  
You can choose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1,L2,L3 as Fixed Length.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.3.12 MSI Plessey  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “MSI”.  
Enable Plessy  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Plessy”.  
Check Digit Verification  
The available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10 Check.  
This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integ-  
rity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the  
data is not transmitted.  
Transmit Check Digit  
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.  
Plessy Transmit Check Digit  
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the Plessy data, this parameter must be enabled.  
Minimum Length  
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to  
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Plessy Minimum Length  
Minimum lengths for the Plessy bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code  
refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (ISCP)  
Code 11  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.3.13 Code 11  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 11”.  
Check Digit Verification  
The available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10  
Check.This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the  
integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm,  
the data is not transmitted.  
Transmit Check Digit  
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.  
Minimum Length  
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to  
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.3.14 Interleaved 2 of 5  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.  
Reading Range  
This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully  
scanned. The default setting, Extended, allows for increased reading distance.  
Check Digit Verification  
The available options for this parameter are Disabled, MOD 10 Check and French CIP.  
“Check Digit Verification” uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to  
ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that  
algorithm, the data is not transmitted.  
190  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (ISCP)  
Matrix 2 of 5  
Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing  
7 characters.  
Transmit Check Digit  
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.  
Set Length L1, Set Length L2, And Set Length L3  
Lengths for “Interleaved 2 of 5” can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the  
number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code  
length that will be recognized by your scanner.  
Length Mode  
You can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1,L2,L3 as Fixed Length.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.3.15 Matrix 2 of 5  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Matrix 2 of 5”.  
Minimum Length  
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to  
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.3.16 Discrete 2 of 5  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.  
Standard 2 of 5 Format  
This parameter allows you to choose a standard format – either Identicon (6 start/stop bars)  
or Computer Identics (4 start/stop bars).  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (ISCP)  
Telepen  
Check Digit Verification  
The available options for this parameter are Disabled and MOD 10 Check. “Check Digit  
Verification” uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity  
of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is  
not transmitted.  
Transmit Check Digit  
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.  
Set Length L1, Set Length L2, And Set Length L3  
Lengths for “Discrete 2 of 5” can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to the  
number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code  
length that will be recognized by your scanner.  
Length Mode  
You can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1,L2,L3 as Fixed Length.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.3.17 Telepen  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Telepen”.  
Format  
This parameter allows you to set the bar code character format to either ASCII or Numeric.  
Minimum Length  
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255. The length of a code refers to  
the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
192  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (ISCP)  
RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)  
5.14.3.18 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)  
Enable  
Setting this parameter to on enables “RSS Code” scanning capability.  
Enable RSS-14  
RSS-14 code can be either purely linear or split in half with one half stacked on top of the  
other half. Stacking the code reduces the bar code length, and providing the nominal height  
of the code is maintained, it can be omni-directionally scanned.  
Enable RSS Limited  
“RSS-Limited” is restricted, in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs (global trade item  
number) that begin with either a 0 or a 1. It is not stackable and is not designed to be read  
omni-directionally.  
Enable RSS Expanded  
“RSS Expanded” uses the same application identifiers as UCC/EAN-128 codes but they can  
be split into sections and stacked several rows high, reducing the length of the symbol, while  
increasing the capacity of data that can be stored. “RSS Expanded” code can be omni-  
directionally scanned.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.3.19 PDF-417  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “PDF-417”.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.3.20 Micro PDF-417  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Micro PDF-417”.  
Code 128 Emulation  
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF-417  
symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Decoded (ISCP)  
Codablock  
If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, the following Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted  
with one of the following prefixes:  
]C1 if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915  
]C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909  
]C0 if the first codeword is 910 or 911  
If Code 128 Emulation is set to off, the Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of  
the following prefixes:  
]L3 if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915  
]L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909  
]L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.3.21 Codablock  
Enable Codablock A  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codablock type A”.  
Enable Codablock F  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codablock type F”.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
194  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Imager  
Imager Options  
5.14.4 Imager  
•
Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Imager.  
5.14.4.1 Imager Options  
TekImager Enabled  
Setting this option to on enables the imager installed in your Ikôn.  
Continuous Scan Mode  
Setting this parameter to on keeps image capture active and continuously decoding as long  
as the scanner button is pressed and held down.  
Center Bar Code Only  
Note: This parameter must be disabled when reading Composite bar codes.  
When more than one bar code is visible in a single snap shot, this parameter allows you to  
specify that only the centre image within the imager framing marker be read. When this pa-  
rameter is set to on, the target dot is pointed at the centre image and only that image  
is returned.  
Max Number Barcodes  
This parameter specifies the maximum number of bar codes the imager will attempt to  
decode in an image. A maximum of 6 bar codes can be decoded at one time.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Imager  
Imager Advanced Options  
Barcodes Must Decode  
This parameter specifies the minimum number of bar codes that the imager must decode in  
order to report success.  
Note: This number must be less than the number of bar codes assigned to “Max Number  
Barcodes”. The driver validates and reassigns the value if necessary.  
Window Width  
“Window Width” determines the width of the captured image in pixels.  
Note: The driver will validate and reassign the value assigned to this parameter, if neces-  
sary; the driver will also use the “Window Width” value to horizontally center the  
image in the field of view.  
Window Height  
This parameter determines the height of the captured image in pixels.  
Note: The driver will validate and reassign the value assigned to this parameter, if neces-  
sary; the driver will also use the “Window Height” value to vertically center the  
image in the field of view.  
Dot Time (msec)  
The value selected for “Dot Time (msec)” determines (in milliseconds) how long the target-  
ing dot remains on before the scanner begins capturing images. When you double-tap on this  
parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value of between 0 and 3000.  
A value of 0 disables the target dot.  
5.14.4.2 Imager Advanced Options  
Important: Do not adjust the advanced options without first consulting Psion Teklogix  
technical support.  
Factory Defaults On Reboot  
The value assigned to this parameter determines whether or not the driver will restore the  
factory defaults to the imager device on the next reboot.  
Note: The driver will default the imager device on a ‘clean’ reset, regardless of the value  
of this parameter.  
196  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Imager  
Min Scan Duration  
This parameter defines the minimum amount of time in seconds that the imager will scan  
when the trigger is pressed and held down without successful decode.  
Note: The actual scan duration when the trigger is pressed relies on the value assigned to  
“Captures Per HW Trigger”, below.  
Captures Per HW Trigger  
The value assigned to this parameter determines the number of captures the imager device  
will take while the imager's internal hardware trigger is held down.  
Note: This parameter, together with “Min Scan Duration”, determines the actual scan  
duration. When the scan trigger is pressed and held down, the driver starts a timer  
based on the value of “Min Scan Duration” and also sends a command to emulate  
the hardware trigger. When completed, if the time has not yet expired, it will send  
another command to the imager device, forcing the imager to flash again using the  
value assigned to “Captures Per HW Trigger”.  
Auto Exposure  
Important: This parameter value should only be changed by qualified Psion Teklogix  
personnel. It should be left at the default value: on.  
Setting this parameter to on allows the imager to make automatic gain, integration and illu-  
mination adjustments based on ambient light before capturing the bar code. If the  
adjustment is insufficient, further adjustments are made automatically before another image  
is captured.  
Fast Converge  
Note: “Auto Exposure” must be set to on in order for this parameter to function.  
Keep in mind that while this parameter can improve imager performance, “Fast  
Converge” increases battery power consumption.  
Setting this parameter to on speeds the “Auto Exposure” process. It allows the imager to  
rapidly snap a number of bar code capture attempts while finding ideal values for gain, inte-  
gration and illumination.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Imager  
Max Gain, Max Integration And Max Illumination  
Important: These parameter values should only be changed by qualified Psion  
Teklogix personnel.  
These parameters represent internal values used by the 2D imager. The “Auto Exposure” pa-  
rameter automatically adjusts the Max Gain, Max Integration and Max Illumination  
parameters to produce the best bar code read. Keep in mind that “Auto Exposure” must be  
set to on in order for these parameter values to be automatically adjusted.  
Double-tapping on any of these parameters displays an associated dialog box in which an al-  
lowable range is displayed: Max Gain – 357 to 7920, Max Integration – 0 to 65535,  
Max Illumination – 0 to 7.  
Decoder Timeout  
The decoder is a set of algorithms that examine the image and attempt to find the bar codes,  
and then turn the pixels into data that the computer can use—this process takes time. “De-  
coder Timeout” limits the amount of time the decoder will spend attempting to decode an  
image, and forces it to stop and grab a new image, which will probably be easier to decode.  
Note: When decoding multiple bar codes in one image, the value assigned to ‘Decoder  
Timeout’ should be increased to 200ms/extra bar code after the first.  
Adaptive Windowing  
“Adaptive Windowing” is an advanced technique used to speed up bar code recognition in  
certain applications. This parameter automatically reduces the size of the window to the  
user-programmed window size when it successfully decodes (which reduces decode time  
the next time it is used), but increases it to the full size window on a failed decode.  
Note: This feature assumes that you have reached an understanding about how the device  
operates in your application, and that, after a learning period, operators will get  
used to using the imager in one particular way. It also assumes that a trained oper-  
ator will usually only have near miss scenarios.  
Constant Illumination  
“Constant Illumination” is used to reduce the intrusiveness of the device’s illumination on  
the observer. Instead of the illumination turning on and off every time the device attempts a  
decode (2-4 times per second), the illumination stays on from the time the trigger is pulled  
until a decode is successful. This feature is useful in low light environments, since it will  
also reduce the distraction that the illumination can have on nearby co-workers.  
198  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Imager  
Code 39 Settings  
5.14.4.3 Code 39 Settings  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 39”.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.4.4 Code 128 Settings  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 128”.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.4.5 EAN 13  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 13”.  
Addendum  
An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter  
provides three options: Disabled, Optional and Required. Depending on the value chosen  
for this parameter, an addendum is recognized or ignored.  
•
•
Double-tap on Addendum to display a dialog box listing your options.  
Highlight an item, and tap on OK.  
When “Addendum” is set to Disabled, the scanner does not recognize an addendum. If this  
parameter is set to Optional, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists,  
appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to Required, the scanner does not  
accept the main bar code without an addendum.  
Note: Setting “Addendum” to ‘Optional’ reduces performance. It should only be chosen if  
at least some of the bar codes being read have addendums.  
Prefix/Suffix  
Refer to “Prefix/Suffix” on page 171.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Imager  
EAN 8  
5.14.4.6 EAN 8  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “EAN 8”.  
Addendum  
Refer to “Addendum” on page 199.  
Prefix/Suffix  
Refer to “Prefix/Suffix” on page 171.  
5.14.4.7 UPC A  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC A”.  
Addendum  
Refer to “Addendum” on page 199.  
Prefix/Suffix  
Refer to “Prefix/Suffix” on page 171.  
5.14.4.8 UPC E  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “UPC E”.  
Addendum  
Refer to “Addendum” on page 199.  
Prefix/Suffix  
Refer to “Prefix/Suffix” on page 171.  
5.14.4.9 Code 93  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Code 93”.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
200  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Imager  
Codabar  
5.14.4.10 Codabar  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Codabar”.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.4.11 Interleaved 2 of 5  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.4.12 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)  
Enable  
Setting this parameter to on enables “RSS Code” scanning capability.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.4.13 Composite  
Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies  
included in a composite bar code must be enabled.  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Composite” bar codes.  
5.14.4.14 PDF-417  
Enable  
Setting this parameter to on enables PDF-417 two dimensional (2D) coding.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Imager  
Micro PDF-417  
5.14.4.15 Micro PDF-417  
Enable  
Setting this parameter to on enables “Micro PDF-417” bar code scanning. Micro PDF-417  
is a multi-row symbology that is useful for applications requiring greater area efficiency but  
lower data capacity than PDF-417.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.4.16 2D Data Matrix  
Enable  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Data Matrix”.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.4.17 2D QR Code  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “2D QR Code”.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.4.18 2D Maxicode  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “2D Maxicode”.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.4.19 2D Aztec  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Aztec”.  
202  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Imager  
Postal: PlaNET  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.4.20 Postal: PlaNET  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: PlaNET”.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.4.21 Postal: PostNET  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: PostNET”.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.4.22 Postal: Australian  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Australian”.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.4.23 Postal: Japanese  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Japanese”.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.4.24 Postal: Korean  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Korean”.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
203  
             
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Options  
Postal: Royal  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.4.25 Postal: Royal  
Enabled  
Set this parameter to on to enable “Postal: Royal”.  
Field Size/Chars  
Refer to “Field Size/Chars” on page 170 for details.  
5.14.5 Options  
This menu allows you to tailor the double-click parameters and the display options associ-  
ated with your scanner.  
5.14.5.1 Double Click Parameters  
Click Time (msec)  
This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click. If the  
time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time, it is con-  
sidered a double-click. The allowable range is 0 to 1000. A value of zero disables  
this feature.  
A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in  
the “Click Data” parameter. When a value is not assigned for the “Click Data”, double-click-  
ing the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the “Dot Time” parameter and  
204  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Options  
initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for the “Click Data” parameter, double-  
clicking the scanner trigger inserts the “Click Data” value rather than initiating a scan.  
Click Data  
For both integrated and external scanners, this parameter determines which character is sent  
to the application installed in your Ikôn following a double-click. A dialog box appears,  
asking that you press the key you want to insert. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the key-  
press is displayed.  
5.14.5.2 Display Parameters  
Scan Result  
When this parameter is enabled, the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the  
screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible  
only while the scanner trigger is pressed. When the trigger is released, this information is  
cleared from the screen.  
Scan Indicator  
When this parameter is enabled, the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the  
scanner is activated.  
Scan Result Time (sec)  
The value assigned to the “Scan Result Time (sec)” parameter determines how long the scan  
results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen. Time is measured in seconds, and a  
value of 0 (zero) disables the parameter. When you choose this option, a dialog box appears  
where you can enter a value.  
Note: To remove the scan result from the screen before the “Result Time” has expired,  
point the scanner away from the bar code and press the trigger.  
Good Scan Beep And Bad Scan Beep  
These parameters determine whether or not the Ikôn emits an audible scanner ‘beep’ when a  
good (successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set these parameters to  
either on to enable the beeper or off to disable it.  
Soft Scan Timeout  
This parameter is used by the SDK “Scan” function (soft-scan: starting a scan session via the  
SDK function, instead of a physical user trigger press). The value assigned to this parameter  
determines the soft-scan timeout from 1 to 10 sec (default is 3 sec).  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Translations  
Scan Log File  
If this parameter is enabled, the input barcode and the modified/translated output bar code  
are logged in the file \Flash Disk\ScanLog.txt. Keep in mind that if the “Scan Log File” is  
enabled, there is a slight performance effect when performing multiple scans since the log  
file is written to persistent storage.  
5.14.6 Translations  
The Translations menu allows you to define up to 10 cases, each consisting of up to 10 rules  
in sequential order. Only one case will be applied to a bar code and a case will only be  
applied if all rules specified in the case are successful—if a rule within a case fails, the entire  
case fails.  
•
In the Translation menu, tap on the Case # to create rules.  
206  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Translations  
•
Tap on the No rule drop-down menu to display the rules.  
When you choose a rule, an associated screen is displayed in which you can define the rule.  
5.14.6.1 Case Rules  
The case rules are defined as follows:  
•
•
No rule—ignored.  
Search and replace—replaces all instances of the match string. (Note that this rule  
cannot fail.)  
•
•
Match at index—matches the match string at a specified index.  
Match and replace at index—matches the match string at a specified index and  
replaces/changes it.  
•
Replace at index—replaces/changes unspecified data in a given range.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5: Configuration  
Translations  
•
•
Add barcode prefix/suffix—adds a global prefix or suffix.  
Verify barcode size—verifies the bar code size. This rule should generally be assigned  
first, before creating subsequent rules.  
Note: Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into account  
when creating subsequent rules. For example, if the bar code size is important, it  
should be checked before any rules that might change the size are applied.  
Translation information about the status of each case/rule is displayed in the scan log file  
(see “Scan Log File” on page 206) when enabled. This is useful if a case fails, and you are  
trying to determine why a rule is failing.  
208  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PERIPHERAL DEVICES & ACCESSORIES  
6
6.1 Carrying Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211  
6.1.1 Attaching The Handstrap With Tether (Model No. CH6021) . . . . . . . . . .211  
6.1.2 Attaching The Tether (Model No. CH6020) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216  
6.1.3 Protective Carrying Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219  
6.2 The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219  
6.3 Adaptor Cable Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219  
6.4 Chargers And Docking Stations: General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219  
6.4.1 Important Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220  
6.4.2 Installation: Chargers And Docking Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221  
6.4.3 Power Consumption Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221  
6.5 CH4000 Desktop Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222  
6.5.1 Operator Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223  
6.5.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223  
6.5.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223  
6.5.3.1 Charging The Ikôn Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223  
6.5.3.2 Charging The Spare Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224  
6.5.3.3 Operating The USB Dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224  
6.5.4 Cleaning The CH4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225  
6.5.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226  
6.5.5.1 Docking Station Does Not Seem To Power On. . . . . . . . . . . . . .226  
6.5.5.2 The Ikôn Charge Indicator LED Stays Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226  
6.5.5.3 The Ikôn Charge Indicator LED Is Fast Flashing Green. . . . . . . . .226  
6.5.5.4 Spare Battery LED Fast Flashes Green With A Battery Installed. . . .226  
6.5.5.5 Spare Battery LED Does Not Turn On When A Battery Is Installed. . .226  
6.6 CH4004 Quad Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227  
6.6.1 Operator Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227  
6.6.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227  
6.5.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223  
6.6.3.1 Charging The Ikôn Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228  
6.6.3.2 Connecting To The Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228  
6.6.4 Cleaning The CH4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6.6.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
6.6.5.1 The Ikôn Charge Indicator LED Stays Off.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
6.6.5.2 The Ikôn Charge Indicator LED Is Fast Flashing Green.. . . . . . . . 230  
6.6.5.3 Green LED OFF When Connected To A Network. . . . . . . . . . . 230  
6.6.5.4 Yellow LED OFF When Connected To A 100Base-T Network. . . . . 230  
6.6.5.5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
6.7 AC Wall Adaptor: Model No. PS1050 - G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
6.8 Automotive Power Adaptor: Model No. CH3050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
6.9 The CH1000 Non-Powered Vehicle Cradle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
6.9.1 Important Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
6.9.2 Vehicle Cradle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
6.9.2.1 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
6.9.2.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
6.9.2.3 Placing The Ikôn In The Vehicle Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
6.9.2.4 Removing The Ikôn From The Vehicle Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234  
6.9.3 CH1000 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234  
6.9.3.1 Mounting Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234  
6.9.4 Cleaning The CH1000 Vehicle Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235  
6.10 The CH1005A Powered Vehicle Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236  
6.10.1 CH1005A Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 238  
6.10.1.1 Mounting Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239  
6.10.2 Cable Arrangement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239  
6.10.3 Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239  
6.10.3.1 Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
6.10.4 USB And Serial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
6.10.5 Using The Vehicle Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242  
6.10.6 Maintaining The Vehicle Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242  
6.11 Scanners And Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242  
6.11.1 Scanning Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
6.11.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
6.11.3 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Laser Scanners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
6.11.4 Operating Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
6.12 Bluetooth Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
210  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Carrying Accessories  
6.1  
Carrying Accessories  
There are a variety of carrying accessories to help the operator work safely and comfortably  
with the Ikôn.  
Table 6.1 Carrying Accessories And Model Numbers  
Carrying Accessory  
Handstrap  
Model Number  
CH6021 (with stylus and tether)  
Protective Carrying Cases  
CH6090 pouch (leather; non-functional, access to DC port,  
includes belt clip)  
CH6095 case (leather; fully functional, access to all Ikôn features,  
includes belt clip)  
Stylus Tether Kit  
CH6020 (stylus, tether and Velcro retainer)  
Important: Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure screws on carrying accesso-  
ries. These chemicals may damage the plastic casing.  
6.1.1  
Attaching The Handstrap With Tether (Model No. CH6021)  
The handstrap with tether can be attached to the back of the Ikôn to provide a secure means  
for operators to carry the PDA.  
Attaching The Handstrap  
The handstrap is attached by fixing the ends of the strap to the anchors located on the back  
and bottom of the unit (see Figure 6.1 on page 212).  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Attaching The Handstrap With Tether (Model No. CH6021)  
Figure 6.1 Attaching The Handstrap  
BACK OF UNIT  
BOTTOM OF UNIT  
Handstrap Anchors  
Elastic Stylus  
Holder  
Velcro Tab  
Velcro Pad  
Eyelet for  
Tether  
Bracket  
(Underneath)  
Screws  
M2 x 4  
Buckle  
Leather  
Velcro  
Elastic  
Strap  
Velcro  
Pad  
Plastic  
Loop  
212  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Attaching The Handstrap With Tether (Model No. CH6021)  
1. Attach the handstrap to the Ikôn by looping the Velcro tab around the pin and adhering  
the tab to the Velcro pad.  
2. Remove the bracket and screws from the Ikôn.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Attaching The Handstrap With Tether (Model No. CH6021)  
3. Slide the bracket through the plastic loop on the handstrap and install the screws.  
4. Adjust the handstrap by pulling up the Velcro tab and readjusting to your hand  
as needed.  
Attaching The Stylus Tether To The Handstrap  
The stylus tether can be attached to the handstrap at the back of the Ikôn.  
1. If not assembled, thread the tether cord through the stylus as shown, pulling the  
cord tight.  
214  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Attaching The Handstrap With Tether (Model No. CH6021)  
2. Thread the tether through the eyelet on the strap.  
3. Pass the stylus through the tether loop and pull the tether snug.  
4. Slip the stylus into the elastic holder, and you’re finished.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Attaching The Tether (Model No. CH6020)  
6.1.2  
Attaching The Tether (Model No. CH6020)  
The tether can be installed to the back of the Ikôn to provide a secure means for attaching the  
stylus to the PDA.  
Figure 6.2 Attaching The Tether  
BACK OF UNIT  
Tether Pin  
Loop  
Velcro  
Tab  
Slip  
Knot  
Eyelet for  
Tether  
Non-Elastic  
Tether  
Elastic Stylus  
Holder  
Velcro  
Pad  
Metal  
Crimp  
216  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Attaching The Tether (Model No. CH6020)  
Attaching The Velcro Retainer  
Attach the retainer to the Ikôn by looping the Velcro tab around the pin and adhering the tab  
to the Velcro pad.  
Attaching The Stylus Tether To The Retainer  
1. If not assembled, thread the tether cord through the stylus as shown, pulling the  
cord tight.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Attaching The Tether (Model No. CH6020)  
2. Thread the tether through the eyelet on the strap.  
3. Pass the stylus through the tether loop and pull the tether snug.  
4. Slip the stylus into the elastic holder, and you’re finished.  
218  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Protective Carrying Cases  
6.1.3  
Protective Carrying Cases  
Two leather carrying cases are available for Ikôns to shield it from damage. The Model No.  
CH6090 pouch fully covers the Ikôn; the Model No. CH6095 case provides full access to  
the Ikôn screen and keyboard for functionality.  
6.2  
The Battery  
The Ikôn operates on a 5000 mAh Lithium Ion battery pack—Model No. CH3000.  
Note: Review Chapter 7: “Specifications” for detailed information. See also “Battery  
5000 mAh (CH3000): Contact Pinout” on page A-3.  
Important: Before opening the battery cover on your Ikôn, press the Power button to  
turn off the PDA.  
6.3  
Adaptor Cable Options  
The following are adaptors that can be ordered for your Ikôn:  
Table 6.2 Cable Model Numbers And Description  
Model Number  
CA1033  
Adaptor Cable Description  
Tether to USB Host.  
CA1032  
Tether to USB Device. (For ActiveSync)  
USB to Ethernet adaptor.  
WA4010 - G1  
CH1050  
Power cable used with quad docking station CH4004.  
6.4  
Chargers And Docking Stations: General Information  
Important: Keep in mind when ordering a charger or docking station, you must also  
order the appropriate power cord separately.  
Psion Teklogix offers a variety of chargers and docking stations for the Ikôn. These include:  
•
•
•
AC Adaptor – Model No. PS1050 - G1 (page 230).  
Automotive Power Adaptor – Model No. CH3050 (see page 231).  
Desktop Docking Station – Model No. CH4000 (see page 222).  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Important Safety Instructions  
•
Quad Docking Station – Model No. CH4004 (see page 227).  
6.4.1  
Important Safety Instructions  
•
•
•
•
Before using the AC adaptor, CH4000 Desktop Docking Station, or CH4004 Quad  
Docking Station, read all instructions and markings on the housing.  
Use the AC adaptor, batteries, and other attachments recommended or sold by Psion  
Teklogix.  
The mains power cord (sold separately) shall comply with the national safety regula-  
tions of the country where the equipment is to be used.  
These docking stations cannot be used with non-Ikôn PDAs. Although they may share  
the same battery terminating connector, they are designed with different applications  
in mind.  
•
•
Do not operate the AC adaptor with a damaged cord or plug. Replace immediately.  
Do not disassemble the AC adaptor; it should be repaired by qualified service personnel.  
Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire.  
•
•
•
To reduce the risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging a docking  
station, pull the plug rather than the cord.  
Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on, tripped over, or otherwise  
subjected to damage or stress.  
Do not operate the AC adaptor, the CH4000, or the CH4004, if it is struck by a sharp  
blow, dropped, or otherwise damaged in any way; it should be inspected by qualified  
service personnel.  
•
•
To reduce the risk of electric shock, unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet before  
attempting any maintenance or cleaning.  
An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary. Use of an improper  
extension cord could result in fire or electric shock. If an extension cord must be used,  
make sure:  
- The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number, size, and shape as those on  
the adaptor.  
- The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition, and that the  
wire size is larger than 18 AWG.  
•
•
Do not expose the AC adaptor to rain or snow. However, both the CH4000 and CH4004  
are designed to accept a wet Ikôn Rugged PDA without harmful effect.  
Do not place batteries in the docking stations if they are cold—temperatures below 0°C  
(32°F). Allow them to warm up to room temperature for at least 30 minutes.  
220  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Installation: Chargers And Docking Stations  
•
•
Do not use a docking station if after an overnight charge, the battery feels warmer than  
the charger housing. The dock should be inspected by qualified service personnel.  
Do not use a docking station if the battery, while charging, becomes more  
than lukewarm.  
6.4.2  
Installation: Chargers And Docking Stations  
When installing a charger or docking station, consider the following guidelines.  
•
•
Keep chargers and docking stations away from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants.  
Chargers will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of 0°C to 40°C  
(32°F to 104°F). It is recommended that the charger or docking station be operated at  
room temperature—between 18°C and 25°C (64°F to 77°F) for maximum performance.  
After unpacking your unit:  
•
•
Visually inspect the charger for possible damage.  
Install the IEC power cord and apply power.  
6.4.3  
Power Consumption Considerations  
Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying chargers and/or docking stations is adequate for  
the load, especially if several chargers and docking stations are being powered from the  
same circuit.  
•
Quad docking station can consume up to 1.9A @ 120VAC or 1.5A @ 240VAC.  
Figure 6.3 AC Adaptors  
CH4004 AC Adaptor  
CH4000 AC Adaptor  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
221  
       
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
CH4000 Desktop Docking Station  
6.5  
CH4000 Desktop Docking Station  
Important: The CH4000 desktop docking station is shipped with its own quick refer-  
ence guide. It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information  
and updates.  
Important: To preserve battery integrity, the desktop docking station will proceed with a  
charge only when the battery temperature falls between 0°C and 40°C  
(32°F to 104°F).  
The CH4000 desktop docking station is a desktop model designed to:  
•
•
•
Fast charge the internal battery.  
Fast charge the spare battery pack (see Figure 6.4 on page 223).  
Supply Type A and Type B USB connectivity to the Ikôn (see Figure 6.5 on page 225).  
The desktop docking station provides sufficient power to concurrently support all the  
above functions.  
The CH4000 storage temperature is -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to 140°F). Operating tempera-  
ture and humidity are: 5 - 95% non-condensing and 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).  
The CH4000 uses careful charge algorithms designed to maximize battery life while ensur-  
ing the shortest possible charge time. The charger supports proprietary Psion Teklogix Smart  
Batteries and handles a range of voltages and charge algorithms. See “The Battery” on  
page 31 for more information regarding battery capacity, charge times and battery life, for  
the Ikôn battery. See “Charging The Spare Battery” on page 224 for spare battery  
charge information.  
222  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Operator Controls  
Figure 6.4 CH4000 Desktop Docking Station Front View  
Rear-Mounted Spare Battery  
Spare Battery Charge LED  
Stylus  
6.5.1  
Operator Controls  
The CH4000 has one operator control—the USB door on the rear, which switches from  
Type A to Type B (see “Operating The USB Dock” on page 224).  
6.5.2  
6.5.3  
Indicators  
The front-mounted LED indicates the spare battery charge status.  
Operation  
6.5.3.1 Charging The Ikôn Battery  
The CH4000 supplies DC power to enable the Ikôn internal fast charger. Normally, it takes  
2.5 to 3.0 hours to charge the Ikôn 5000 mAh battery.  
When installed in the dock, the Ikôn battery charge LED will illuminate to indicate the unit  
has external power and may charge the internal battery. The Ikôn charge indication follows  
the same convention as the charger's spare battery indicator (Figure 6.4 on page 223).  
Note: Battery charging continues whether the Ikôn is switched on or off.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Charging The Spare Battery  
6.5.3.2 Charging The Spare Battery  
Important: Do not store spare batteries in a charger for more than 72 hours. Doing so  
may damage the battery or reduce its charge capacity.  
•
•
Install the battery in the rear slot of the CH4000 with the connector facing to the right.  
Slide the battery in and down to mate the connector.  
The CH4000 spare battery LED lights up immediately. During charge the LED will be  
flashing green.  
•
•
When the battery capacity reaches 95%, the LED turns solid green.  
The charge stops when the battery is fully charged and the LED remains green.  
A full charge will take 2.5 to 3.0 hours for a 5000 mAh battery.  
6.5.3.3 Operating The USB Dock  
The CH4000 Desktop Docking Station offers a rear-mounted host or device USB connec-  
tion to the Ikôn. The Ikôn supports communication with low- and full-speed USB 1.1  
compliant devices and hosts through the docking station. The Type B receptacle may be  
used for ActiveSync® among other applications typical for a Type B device (Figure 6.5 on  
page 225).  
Move the sliding door selector to alternate between the Type A and Type B USB ports.  
224  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Cleaning The CH4000  
Figure 6.5 CH4000 Desktop Docking Station Rear View  
Type A USB Port  
Sliding Door  
DC Jack  
Type B USB Port  
Sliding Door  
DC Jack  
Linking An Ikôn To A PC  
The desktop docking station can be connected to a PC so that you can exchange files in the  
same way that you would between PC drives. A USB cable is included with your  
docking station.  
Note: For information about data transfer with the Windows XP operating system and  
ActiveSync and with the Vista operating system, refer to “Data Transfer Between  
The PC And The Ikôn” on page 19.  
To link the Ikôn to a PC:  
•
•
Insert the Ikôn in the desktop docking station.  
Insert the USB cable into the docking station Type B USB connector. Attach the other  
end of the cable to a USB port on the PC.  
6.5.4  
Cleaning The CH4000  
Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent  
to wipe the unit clean.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Troubleshooting  
•
•
Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the CH4000.  
Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is  
susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and  
gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.  
To clean ink marks from the label, use isopropyl alcohol.  
6.5.5  
Troubleshooting  
6.5.5.1 Docking Station Does Not Seem To Power On.  
•
When first connected to the DC power supply, the spare charger LED should turn ON  
and remain on for 3 seconds.  
•
If not, the charger is defective and requires service.  
6.5.5.2 The Ikôn Charge Indicator LED Stays Off.  
When an Ikôn is docked into a powered CH4000 and its charge indicator LED stays off,  
there could be a problem with the Ikôn or with the docking station. Use an Ikôn with a prop-  
erly functioning charge indicator to isolate the problem.  
6.5.5.3 The Ikôn Charge Indicator LED Is Fast Flashing Green.  
If the Ikôn charge indicator fast flashes green when the Ikôn is docked:  
•
•
•
Remove the Ikôn and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable.  
Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again.  
If the Ikôn indicator still shows a fault, the Ikôn requires service.  
6.5.5.4 Spare Battery LED Fast Flashes Green With A Battery Installed.  
•
•
Try inserting a battery that is known to be working with another charger.  
If the charge slot LED continues to fast flash green with the known working battery, the  
charger is defective and requires service.  
•
Your Psion Teklogix battery and desktop docking station are carefully designed for  
safety and capacity performance in accordance with IEEE 1725. If the battery or  
charger are not Psion Teklogix approved products, or the safety mechanism is faulty, the  
spare charge slot LED or Ikôn LED will rapidly flash green.  
6.5.5.5 Spare Battery LED Does Not Turn On When A Battery Is Installed.  
•
Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or  
broken?).  
•
Reinstall the battery and check that it is fully seated in the slot.  
226  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
CH4004 Quad Docking Station  
•
•
Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot.  
Disconnect and reconnect the DC adaptor, and check that the spare battery LED indica-  
tor flashes at power-up.  
•
If the charge slot fails to charge the known working battery, it is defective and  
requires service.  
6.6  
CH4004 Quad Docking Station  
Important: The CH4000 desktop docking station is shipped with its own quick refer-  
ence guide. It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information  
and updates.  
The CH4004 Quad Docking Station (Figure 6.6 on page 227) is a desktop model designed  
to accept as many as four Ikôn Rugged PDAs. The docking station powers the Ikôns and  
their internal battery charger. The docking station also connects from one to four Ikôns to a  
10/100 Base-T Ethernet network and allows for Ethernet data transfer.  
Figure 6.6 CH4004 Quad Docking Station Front View  
6.6.1  
6.6.2  
Operator Controls  
The CH4004 has no operator controls or power switch.  
Indicators  
The quad docking station has two rear Ethernet LEDs and no front LEDs.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Operation  
6.6.3  
Operation  
6.6.3.1 Charging The Ikôn Battery  
Insert the adaptor's DC power MINI FIT JR plug into the CH4004 rear DC input receptacle.  
The adaptor LED should be ON when powered from the mains.  
The CH4004 supplies DC power to enable the Ikôn internal fast charger. Normally, it takes  
2.5 to 3.0 hours to charge the Ikôn 5000 mAh battery.  
•
•
During charge the Ikôn LED will be a slow flashing green.  
When the battery capacity reaches 95%, the LED turns solid green.  
When installed in the docking station, the Ikôn battery charge LED will illuminate to indi-  
cate the unit has external power and may charge the internal battery.  
Note: Battery charging continues whether the Ikôn is switched on or off.  
6.6.3.2 Connecting To The Ethernet Network  
The rear-mounted RJ45 connector incorporates LEDs that indicate data traffic (see  
Figure 6.7) when:  
•
•
•
The Ikôn is in the docking station and powered on;  
The docking station is powered by the AC adaptor;  
The docking station is connected to Ethernet network with a Category 5 cable plugged  
into the RJ45 rear socket.  
The green Link LED flashes to indicate the presence of data traffic. The yellow Speed LED  
is steady ON when the network is 100 Mbps and OFF when the network is 10 Mbps.  
228  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Cleaning The CH4004  
Figure 6.7 CH4004 Quad Docking Station Rear View  
RJ45 Ethernet Port  
Link LED  
Speed LED  
MINI FIT JR DC Input  
Network Access  
The Ikôn automatically detects insertion into the docking station and loads the appropriate  
drivers to communicate with the network.  
Network Addressing  
The host application uses standard TCP/IP protocol to name, locate and communicate with a  
specific Ikôn on the network.  
If a link is established between an Ikôn and a host, the application on the host and on the  
Ikôn must have a recovery mechanism in the event that the Ikôn is removed from the dock,  
interrupting the link.  
6.6.4  
Cleaning The CH4004  
Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent  
to wipe the unit clean.  
•
•
Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the CH4004.  
Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is  
susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and  
gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.  
To clean ink marks from the label, use isopropyl alcohol.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Troubleshooting  
6.6.5  
Troubleshooting  
6.6.5.1 The Ikôn Charge Indicator LED Stays Off.  
When an Ikôn is docked into a powered CH4004 and its charge indicator LED stays off,  
there could be a problem with the Ikôn or with the docking station. Use an Ikôn with a prop-  
erly functioning charge indicator to isolate the problem.  
6.6.5.2 The Ikôn Charge Indicator LED Is Fast Flashing Green.  
If the Ikôn charge indicator fast flashes green when the Ikôn is in any of the four sites:  
•
•
•
Remove the Ikôns and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable.  
Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again.  
If the Ikôn indicator still shows a fault, the Ikôn requires service.  
6.6.5.3 Green LED OFF When Connected To A Network.  
•
•
Check the Category 5/5e cable. Replace if the cable is suspect.  
Contact your network administrator.  
6.6.5.4 Yellow LED OFF When Connected To A 100Base-T Network.  
•
•
Check the Ethernet cable. Replace if the cable is suspect.  
Contact your network administrator to ensure the network is running at 100 Mbps.  
6.6.5.5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off.  
•
•
Check the AC cable. Replace with the same type if the cable is suspect.  
If the adaptor's LED stays OFF, the adaptor is defective and requires service.  
6.7  
AC Wall Adaptor: Model No. PS1050 - G1  
The AC wall adaptor available for your Ikôn allows you to operate your PDA using AC  
power while charging the battery inserted in the unit.  
Adaptor plugs suitable for use in the following countries are shipped with the AC wall adap-  
tor: United Kingdom, Switzerland, Japan, Israel, Australia, Europe, and North America (see  
Figure 6.8 on page 231).  
230  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Automotive Power Adaptor: Model No. CH3050  
Figure 6.8 AC Wall Adaptor Plugs  
Universal AC Power Supply  
Adaptor Plugs  
DC Power Plugs  
•
Choose the adaptor plug that is suitable for use in your country. Slide the adaptor plug  
into the Universal AC power supply, snapping it into place. These two pieces, coupled  
together, are referred to as an AC wall adaptor.  
•
•
Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN port at the base of the Ikôn, located between  
the tether and LIF ports.  
Plug the pronged end into an AC outlet.  
6.8  
Automotive Power Adaptor: Model No. CH3050  
Important: It is critical that you review the safety instructions outlined in the quick  
start guide enclosed with your automotive power adaptor before using  
the accessory.  
The automotive power adaptor allows you to power your Ikôn and recharge your battery  
using power drawn from your vehicle’s automotive power outlet.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
The CH1000 Non-Powered Vehicle Cradle  
Figure 6.9 CH3050 Automotive Power Adaptor  
Automotive Power  
Adaptor Plug  
DC Power Plug  
•
•
Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN port at the base of the Ikôn.  
Insert the automotive power adaptor plug into automotive power outlet in your vehicle.  
6.9  
The CH1000 Non-Powered Vehicle Cradle  
Important: The CH1000 vehicle cradle is shipped with its own quick reference guide.It  
is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.  
The CH1000 Vehicle Cradle is a passive device, designed to securely grip the Ikôn. The  
cradle design permits access for the DC input cable to connect to the Ikôn (see Figure 6.10  
on page 233). The cradle is also equipped with:  
•
•
•
A stylus holder.  
A loop for tethering the stylus.  
A tidy for draping the power cables or storing the disconnected DC plug.  
Important: Shock and vibration specifications for the Ikôn are verified using Psion  
®
Teklogix-approved RAM mounts and mounting hardware. Use of non-  
certified Psion Teklogix mounting hardware is not recommended, and may  
void warranty coverage.  
232  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Important Instructions  
Figure 6.10 CH1000 Vehicle Cradle  
Cable Tidy  
Restraining Mechanisms  
Stylus Well  
Cable Pass-thru  
6.9.1  
6.9.2  
Important Instructions  
The CH1000 storage temperature is -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F). Operating humidity  
and temperature is 5 - 95% non-condensing and -30°C to 60°C (-22°F to 140°F).  
Vehicle Cradle Operation  
6.9.2.1 Operator Controls  
The vehicle cradle has no operator controls or power switch.  
6.9.2.2 Indicators  
The CH1000 has no front indicators. The Ikôn LED serves as the power indicator.  
6.9.2.3 Placing The Ikôn In The Vehicle Cradle  
Connect the vehicle power to the Ikôn prior to inserting it in the vehicle cradle.  
The vehicle cradle is designed with a front opening through which you can pass the con-  
nected cable while inserting the Ikôn (see Figure 6.10).  
When placing the Ikôn into the vehicle cradle, press firmly on the top of the PDA and the  
Ikôn will bottom out on the cradle base. This action will make the final fit to the cradle base  
to allow the rear restraining mechanism to resist vibration.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Removing The Ikôn From The Vehicle Cradle  
6.9.2.4 Removing The Ikôn From The Vehicle Cradle  
When removing the Ikôn, apply slight pressure to the rear and pull upwards. The rear-first  
motion will assist in disengaging the rear restraining mechanism.  
6.9.3  
CH1000 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations  
Important: Before mounting a vehicle cradle in a vehicle, there are a number of opera-  
tor safety issues that require careful attention. An improperly mounted  
cradle may result in one or more of the following: operator injury, operator  
visibility obstruction, operator distraction and/or poor ease of egress for the  
operator. Psion Teklogix strongly recommends that you seek professional  
mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer.  
Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration, especially for sepa-  
rately tethered scanners and other devices with loose cables. If you are unable to obtain  
suitable advice, contact Psion Teklogix for assistance. Note also that for better protection,  
the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage.  
®
Important: The Ikôn Vehicle Cradles are designed to be compatible with any RAM -B  
mounting interface. For other mounting options please contact our Techni-  
cal Support offices.  
In addition, for safety reasons, only pedestal mounts with fully locking  
joints should be used in vehicles. Always adjust the pedestal for the  
optimum viewing angle, and securely tighten the hex and wing screws.  
The most effective way to mount the vehicle cradle RAM mount is to use the seven #M4  
threaded inserts on the rear of the unit. Bolts must not extend more than 5mm into the  
vehicle cradle. You may also remove the rear Ram-B mount accessory to custom mount the  
vehicle cradle to a surface other than the recommended RAM-B (Figure 6.11 on page 235)  
6.9.3.1 Mounting Template  
For detailed mounting instructions including a drill template, refer to the CH1000 Ikôn  
Rugged PDA Vehicle Cradle Quick Reference Guide (PN 8100149).  
In every case, please take the following precautions:  
•
•
•
When installing the cradle, ensure the driver's view is not obstructed.  
Install cradles so as not to obstruct vehicle safety features, i.e. air bags, seat belts, etc.  
Ensure cradle is secured to the vehicle in a safe location. Injury may result otherwise.  
234  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Cleaning The CH1000 Vehicle Cradle  
•
•
Ensure the mounting has the capacity to hold the cradle and the Ikôn. Cradle plus Ikôn  
weight is approximately 1kg (2.2 lb.).  
Psion Teklogix has recommended and approved mounts—consult Customer Service  
for information.  
Figure 6.11 Removing The RAM Mount Interface  
To accommodate the service loop of the power cable, leave a 10.2 cm (4 in.) clearance at the  
bottom of the vehicle cradle. Leave a 17.8 cm (7 in.) clearance at the top of the vehicle  
cradle to allow easy removal of the Ikôn. When selecting a mounting location, refer to the  
detailed assembly instructions that are packaged with the pedestal.  
Important: Before Psion Teklogix releases a product, our engineering team exposes  
that product to vibration tests to ensure the Ikôn will remain secure during  
normal use. But as a low cost mount, the cradle will not defend against  
shock if the vehicle undergoes a front or rear impact. Take care to mount  
the cradle in an upright position in case of accidents.  
If you elect to use a third party company-produced cradle, Psion Teklogix cannot take re-  
sponsibility for the effects of that third party product when it causes failure to our device.  
6.9.4  
Cleaning The CH1000 Vehicle Cradle  
Important: Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
The CH1005A Powered Vehicle Cradle  
•
•
Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the CH1000.  
Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is  
susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and  
gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.  
To clean ink marks from the label, use isopropyl alcohol.  
6.10 The CH1005A Powered Vehicle Cradle  
The CH1005A Powered Vehicle Cradle (12-24 VDC) is designed to securely grip the Ikôn  
when locked in and provides an easy single-handed release mechanism when the Ikôn needs  
to be quickly removed from the cradle. The cradle design permits access for the DC input  
cable to connect to the Ikôn (see Figure 6.15 on page 241). The cradle is also equipped with:  
•
•
•
•
One USB A connector.  
LED charge indicator.  
A stylus holder and tether latch.  
Built in speaker, identical to the one on Ikôn, that offers hands-free functionality. The  
powered cradle detects when the Ikôn is docked and can automatically transfer the  
speaker function from the Ikôn to the cradle.  
•
Depending on the cradle variant, there can be up to two full RS-232 connectors.  
- PN 1081148-500: no RS-232 connectors.  
- PN 1081148-400: one RS-232 connector.  
- PN 1081148-200: two RS-232 connectors.  
The cradle comes with four mounting screws and a CH1005A Powered Cradle Quick Start  
Guide (PN 8000164), with illustrated electrical and mounting instructions.  
Before Psion Teklogix releases a product, our engineering team exposes that product  
through a series of severe testing to ensure that it will survive in the rugged environments in  
which our products are typically used. These tests usually include shock and vibration  
testing as well as IP testing for water and dust, electrical shock, etc.  
If a third party vehicle mount is used, the third party should perform the same type of testing  
in order to ensure that the design will maintain the factory specifications of the product. If  
the third party company is unwilling to perform the necessary testing and take responsibility  
for the effects of the design, then we highly recommend using Psion Teklogix designed and  
supported accessories.  
If you elect to use a third party company produced cradle, Psion Teklogix cannot take re-  
sponsibility for the effects of that third party product if it causes failure of our device.  
236  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
The CH1005A Powered Vehicle Cradle  
Important: Before using a Vehicle Cradle, read all instructions and markings on  
the housing.  
Do not operate a Vehicle Cradle if damaged by a sharp blow, dropped, or  
otherwise damaged in any way; qualified service personnel should inspect  
for internal damage.  
Shock and vibration specifications for the Ikôn are verified using Psion  
®
Teklogix-approved RAM mounts and mounting hardware. Use of non-  
certified Psion Teklogix mounting hardware is not recommended, and may  
void warranty coverage.  
Do not expose to rain or snow! However, the Powered Vehicle Cradle is  
designed to accept a wet Ikôn handheld without harmful effect.  
This Powered Vehicle Cradle cannot be used with non- Ikôn  
cradle accessories.  
Figure 6.12 CH1005A Front View  
Latches  
Stylus Well  
Docking Connector  
Speaker  
DC Power LED  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
237  
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
CH1005A Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations  
6.10.1 CH1005A Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations  
Important: Before mounting a vehicle cradle in a vehicle, there are a number of opera-  
tor safety issues that require careful attention. An improperly mounted  
vehicle cradle may result in one or more of the following: operator injury,  
operator visibility obstruction, operator distraction and/or poor ease of  
egress for the operator. Psion Teklogix strongly recommends that you seek  
professional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer.  
Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration,  
especially for separately tethered scanners and other devices with loose  
cables. If you are unable to obtain suitable advice, contact Psion Teklogix  
for assistance.  
In addition, for safety reasons, only pedestal mounts with fully locking  
joints should be used in vehicles. Always adjust the pedestal for the  
optimum viewing angle, and securely tighten the hex and wing screws.  
The Ikôn Powered Vehicle Cradle is designed to be compatible with any RAM-B  
mounting interface.  
The most effective way to mount the vehicle cradle RAM mount is to use the four #M4X12  
threaded inserts on the rear of the unit (see Figure 6.13). Bolts are supplied with the cradle  
and must not extend more than 7 mm into the vehicle cradle.  
Figure 6.13 CH1005A Rear View  
Stylus Tether  
Ring  
#M4X10 Threaded Inserts  
Mounting Base  
Cradle  
DC Power Port  
238  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Mounting Template  
If you wish to custom mount the vehicle cradle to a surface other than the recommended  
RAM-B, please take the following precautions:  
•
•
•
•
When installing the cradle, ensure the driver’s view is not obstructed.  
Install cradles so as not to obstruct vehicle safety features, i.e. airbags, seat belts, etc.  
Ensure cradle is secured to the vehicle in a safe location. Injury may result otherwise.  
Ensure the mounting has capacity to hold the cradle and Ikôn. Cradle plus Ikôn weight  
is approximately 1.3 kg.  
•
Psion Teklogix has recommended and approved mounts—consult Customer Service  
for instructions.  
To accommodate the service loop of the connecting cable, leave a 10 cm clearance at the  
bottom of the vehicle cradle. Leave a 17 cm clearance at the top of the vehicle cradle to  
allow easy removal of the Ikôn. Refer to the detailed assembly instructions that are pack-  
aged with the pedestal when selecting a mounting location.  
6.10.1.1 Mounting Template  
For detailed mounting instructions including a drill template, refer to the Ikôn CH1005A  
Powered Vehicle Cradle Quick Reference Guide (PN 8000165).  
6.10.2 Cable Arrangement  
Before installing cables between the cradle and other devices, review the following:  
•
•
•
•
Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring.  
Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating and physical damage.  
Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal.  
Use plastic straps and tie-downs to secure cables and connectors in their desired loca-  
tion, away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled.  
•
•
Keep cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid and other potential hazards.  
Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the  
cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle.  
6.10.3 Electrical Requirements  
The Powered Vehicle Cradle is designed to allow the Ikôn to be powered by a vehicle bat-  
tery. The battery installed in the Ikôn is also recharged by the vehicle battery system.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle  
Warning: Applying a voltage above 36VDC or reversing polarity may result in perma-  
nent damage to the vehicle cradle power section and will void the product  
warranty. For safety reasons, disconnect the vehicle cradle power cable  
when the vehicle battery is being charged by an source other than the  
vehicle alternator.  
6.10.3.1 Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle  
The Powered Vehicle Cradle uses the automotive power outlet or the vehicle fuse box to  
power from the vehicle battery system. The CLA power cable (PN 1081141) is used for the  
automotive power outlet; the Power Extension cable (PN 1081142) is used for the vehicle  
fuse box.  
Figure 6.14 CLA Power Cable  
Automotive Power  
Adaptor Plug  
DC Power Plug  
Power cables are equipped with fuses and instructions are supplied with each cable. Use  
only a 4A slow blow Safety-approved fuse in the fuse assembly.  
These cables should only supply operating power from the vehicle to the Powered Vehicle  
Cradle from 12VDC or 24VDC systems.  
•
The Powered Vehicle Cradle draws no more than 1.9A @ 12VDC or 0.95A @ 24VDC.  
Any additional wiring, connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 4A.  
The Powered Vehicle Cradle and peripherals can be used with both negative ground  
systems when using the Power Extension cable. Peripheral wiring should be closely  
examined to avoid ground loops in positive ground systems.  
•
There is the option of connecting power to the cradle before or after the ‘key’ switch.  
240  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
USB And Serial Connections  
- It is preferable to wire after the key switch. In this configuration, when the key is  
turned ON, the vehicle will power the cradle and docked Ikôn, charging the internal  
battery when needed. When the vehicle ignition is OFF, the Ikôn docked in the cradle  
will run on its internal battery.  
- However, if the operator switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a  
shift, it may make more sense to wire the vehicle cradle before the switch. In this  
case, the Ikôn will always operate from vehicle power and that power will charge the  
battery when needed.  
- Keep in mind that the Ikôn will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as  
long as the internal battery has sufficient charge.  
6.10.4 USB And Serial Connections  
Important: Depending on the configuration, the CH1005A Powered Vehicle Cradle  
has up to three data connectors and one power connector.  
The Powered Vehicle Cradle full configuration consists of two serial DE-9M ports and one  
USB Type A port located at the base of the product. These are COM and USB ports that  
allow the communication of serial and USB devices with the Ikôn. These ports are:  
•
•
•
One powered USB A (Host).  
One full Serial port.  
One Serial port that provides power over pin 9. This port is located nearest the front  
LED and is marked as COM 6 in Figure 6.15.  
Figure 6.15 CH1005A Ports  
USB A (Host)  
Port  
Serial Port A  
(COM 5)  
Serial Port B  
(COM 6)  
DC Power Port  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
241  
   
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Using The Vehicle Cradle  
Peripherals such as scanners, printers, GPS, etc., may be used with the Ikôn and the cradle.  
Check with Psion Teklogix if there is any compatibility issue with the device you want to  
use with the Ikôn and the cradle.  
6.10.5 Using The Vehicle Cradle  
If your Ikôn is equipped with a shoulder strap or protective cover, these accessories need to  
be removed before installing the unit in a vehicle cradle. There is no need to remove hand-  
straps or tethered devices from the unit.  
•
Slide the Ikôn into the cradle, and press firmly downward to the point where resistance  
is met. Press the Ikôn down through the resistance until it bottoms in the cradle—the  
locks on the latches will engage. This can be one smooth motion if you wish. Electrical  
contact will not be made until the Ikôn is fully inserted. On a vehicle, it’s a good idea to  
pull up on the Ikôn to be certain that it is secure.  
•
To remove the unit, push the latches upwards—the Ikôn will be released so that it can  
be removed.  
6.10.6 Maintaining The Vehicle Cradle  
•
Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the  
unit clean.  
•
Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the  
vehicle cradle.  
•
•
Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents, or strong chemicals for cleaning.  
The vehicle cradle has a plastic case and stamped logo that is susceptible to harsh chem-  
icals. The plastic and stamping is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline.  
They slowly decompose in strong alkaline solutions.  
•
•
To clean ink marks from the label, use isopropyl alcohol.  
The two-lock assembly in the Powered Vehicle Cradle holds the Ikôn firmly in place.  
Although this mechanism is designed for at least 20,000 cycles, it will wear over time  
and will no longer lock the Ikôn securely in the cradle. For replacement parts and  
instructions contact Psion Teklogix. Partial disassembly is required.  
6.11 Scanners And Imagers  
The Ikôn supports several scanner/imager options to address a variety of user application re-  
quirements. The scanner/imager installed in your unit can be configured using the Scanner  
Settings dialog box in the Control Panel (see page 161), the Manage Triggers application  
(see page 106), and Teklogix.  
242  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Scanning Techniques  
Scanner/imagers available for your Ikôn include: 1D Laser SE955, 1D Imager EV15, and  
the 2D Imager SX5400.  
It is critical that you review the safety information in the Ikôn Rugged PDA Regulatory &  
Warranty Guide, PN 8000148, before proceeding.  
6.11.1 Scanning Techniques  
•
Hold the scanner at an angle. Do not hold it perpendicular to the bar code.  
•
Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code. In this position, light can reflect back  
into the scanner’s exit window and prevent a successful decode.  
•
Scan the entire bar code. If you are using a 1D laser scanner, make certain that the scan  
beam crosses every bar and space on the bar code, including the margins on either end  
of the symbol.  
•
•
If you are using a 2D imaging scanner, make certain the red, oval shaped framing mark  
is centered within the bar code you want to scan.  
When using imaging scanners, do not move the scanner while decoding the bar code.  
Movement blurs the image.  
•
•
Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes.  
Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together.  
A bar code icon appears on the screen during a scan. While the scanner beam is active, the  
onscreen message states: SCANNING. If you want to turn off the onscreen message, disable  
Scan Indication in the Options tab of the Scanner Settings menu in the Control Panel.  
When the scan is successful, the bar code data is displayed on the screen until the scan  
button is released, but only if Scan Result is turned on in the Options tab of the Scanner Set-  
tings menu in the Control Panel.  
6.11.2 Troubleshooting  
If the scanner is not working, investigate the following:  
•
•
Is the unit on?  
Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enabled for the Ikôn you are using.  
Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the bar code.  
•
Check the bar code to make sure it is not damaged. Try scanning a different bar code to  
verify that the problem is not with the bar code.  
•
•
Check that the bar code is within the proper range.  
Does the Ikôn display the warning without scanning? This suggests a hardware problem  
in the PDA.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Operating One Dimensional (1D) Laser Scanners  
•
•
Is the laser beam scanning across the bar code?  
Once the scan beam has stopped, check the scanner window for dirt or fogging.  
6.11.3 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Laser Scanners  
•
Turn the Ikôn on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.  
Important: If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner, the dot will be enabled  
for a configurable time period (including off), after which normal scanning  
begins. Refer to “Dot Time (msec)” on page 165 for details.  
Double-clicking the button will override the aiming delay and initiate an  
immediate scan. Note that the aiming dot is standard on long-range and  
high visibility internal scanners.  
•
Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the button. A scan beam and a warning  
indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed.  
6.11.4 Operating Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers  
An imager takes a snap shot of a single bar code or multiple bar codes (at one time). It can  
find a bar code regardless of its orientation—that is, even a bar code printed at a 45 degree  
angle to the Ikôn will be decoded successfully.  
Note: When scanning multiple bar codes, ensure that all of the desired bar codes are  
within the field of view of the scanner. It is possible that even when all bar codes are  
within the field of view, not all of them will be decoded. Only successfully decoded  
bar codes are passed to the application program. The application program then  
issues a warning, asking that you scan the missing bar codes.  
When scanning a single bar code, ensure that only the desired bar code is within the  
field of view of the scanner.  
Because imagers generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners, some practise  
may be required to find the optimal distance from the types of bar codes being scanned. Al-  
though the imager includes illumination LEDs, ambient light will help the imager decode  
the bar codes, especially if the bar code is far from the Ikôn.  
244  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Bluetooth Peripherals  
Important: Keep in mind that the imager scanner is a camera, and the LED illumina-  
tion is a flash. Glare can be an issue on reflective media such as plastic  
coated bar codes, just as glare is an issue for photographers. When pointing  
at a shiny surface, either shift the bar code to the side or top, or angle the  
bar code so that the glare reflects away from the imager scanner.  
Most imagers take several ‘snap shots’ of the bar code in order to decode it.  
It is normal for the LEDs to flash two or three times. Hold the unit steady  
between flashes to improve decode performance.  
•
•
Turn the Ikôn on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.  
Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the button. Hold the button until a success-  
ful or failed scan result is obtained.  
•
When the scan button is pressed, a red, oval shaped light (the framing marker) is dis-  
played. Centre the framing marker in the field—either in the centre of the bar code you  
want to scan or in the centre of the area in which multiple bar codes are to be scanned.  
The illumination LEDs will flash (typically several times) and a picture of the bar code(s)  
is taken.  
6.12 Bluetooth Peripherals  
The Ikôn is equipped with a Bluetooth radio, making it is possible to communicate with a  
variety of Bluetooth peripherals, including GSM/GPRS handsets, scanners, printers, and  
so on.  
Psion Teklogix provides built-in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below.  
•
•
•
GSM/GPRS universal handset.  
Bluetooth printer.  
Bluetooth headset.  
Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802.11b/g radios both operate in the 2.4GHz band.  
Although the Ikôn includes features to minimize interference, performance of the system  
will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously. Typically, when both radios  
operate in the Ikôn at the same time, they cannot transmit simultaneously—this has a nega-  
tive impact on overall system throughput. To minimize the impact on the backbone 802.11g  
network, Psion Teklogix recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction  
rates (such as printers and scanners).  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories  
Bluetooth Peripherals  
Refer to “Bluetooth Setup” on page 111 for information about setting up your Bluetooth  
devices for communication. In addition, review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth  
device to determine the method used to pair with the Ikôn host.  
246  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIFICATIONS  
7
7.1 Ikôn Rugged PDA Specifications (Model No. 7505) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249  
7.1.1 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249  
7.1.2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251  
7.1.3 Wireless Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251  
7.1.4 Bar Code Applications (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252  
7.1.5 Camera (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252  
7.1.6 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252  
7.1.7 Approvals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253  
7.2 Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253  
7.2.1 802.11b/g WLAN Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253  
7.2.2 Siemens MC75 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254  
7.2.3 Siemens HC25 UMTS Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255  
7.2.4 Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258  
7.3 Lithium-Ion Battery 5000 mAh Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258  
7.4 Scanner/Imager Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259  
7.4.1 SE 955HP Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259  
7.4.1.1 SE 955HP Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260  
7.4.2 EV15 Imager Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260  
7.4.2.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261  
7.4.3 SX5400* Imager Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262  
7.4.3.1 SX5400 Imager Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Specifications  
Ikôn Rugged PDA Specifications (Model No. 7505)  
7.1  
Ikôn Rugged PDA Specifications (Model No. 7505)  
Note: Performance specifications are nominal & subject to change without notice.  
7.1.1  
Hardware  
Physical Dimensions  
•
16 cm x 8.1 cm x 4.5 cm (6.3 in. x 3.2 in. x 1.8 in.).  
Weight (with battery pack)  
450 g (1.0 lbs.) with battery pack.  
User Interface  
Color Touchscreen Display:  
•
9.39 cm (3.7 in.) diagonal.  
Full VGA 480x640 resolution.  
Transflective, portrait mode TFT.  
Adjustable Backlight.  
Sunlight readable (for outdoor use).  
High reliability LED backlight.  
Easily replaceable and customizable bezel.  
Passive stylus or finger operation.  
Signature capture.  
Keyboards:  
Numeric.  
Alphanumeric.  
Numeric with Phone (option only in countries with  
GPRS availability).  
Ergonomically enhanced for ambidextrous, one-  
hand operation.  
Backlit, high durability hard-capped keys.  
Indicators And Controls:  
Audio:  
3 LEDs indicate battery charge, application, and  
radio on/off status.  
Hands-free speaker, total output volume: 95dB SPL  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
249  
   
Chapter 7: Specifications  
Hardware  
Microphone/Receiver.  
Wireless headset via Bluetooth capability.  
Audio jack (mono).  
Expansion Slots  
•
•
One microSD memory card slot—user accessible.  
60-PIN expansion interface: supports GSM/GPRS EDGE, and other third-party expan-  
sion modules developed using Psion Teklogix Ikôn Rugged PDA Hardware  
Developer’s Kit.  
•
Flex cable interface with robust connector: supports scanner (serial) and imager  
(USB) modules.  
External Connectors  
•
•
•
One Tether connection with full RS-232 and USB On-the-Go (OTG) functionality.  
One Low-Insertion Force (LIF) docking connector.  
DC Power Jack.  
Power Management  
•
Battery Pack: Lithium Ion 5000 mAh capacity with 8-hour life under normal operating  
conditions (see page 258 for battery specifications).  
•
•
•
Advanced Smart Battery with gas gauge.  
3 power source options: Runs off battery, AC power, or automotive power supplies.  
Backup power: >10 minutes.  
Environmental Specifications  
Drop Test:  
Withstands 6 drops at 1.5 meters (5 ft.) on  
all surfaces.  
Rain/Dust:  
IP65, IEC 60529.  
Operating Temperature:  
Relative Humidity:  
Storage Temperature:  
Shock and Vibration:  
ESD:  
-10°C to +50°C (14°F to 122°F).  
5% to 95% RH non-condensing.  
-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to 140°F).  
5 to 400 Hz PSD (random) and 30 g (3 axis).  
+/- 8kVdc air discharge, +/- 4kVdc contacts.  
250  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Specifications  
Software  
7.1.2  
Software  
Platform  
•
•
XScale PXA270 @ 624 MHz, 32 bit RISC CPU.  
128 MB flash, 128 MB RAM.  
Operating System  
®
®
•
Microsoft Windows CE 5.0.  
Programming Environment  
•
•
•
•
•
Psion Teklogix Mobile Devices SDK.  
Hardware Development Kit (HDK).  
®
®
.NET and C++ programming using Microsoft Visual Studio 2005.  
Java programming supporting JDK 1.2.2 or higher.  
Standard Protocol APIs: Windows sockets (CE .net).  
Application Software  
•
•
•
•
Internet Explorer 6.0 incl.with Windows CE 5.0.  
Unique Psion Teklogix Voice Dialer and Contacts Manager incl.Windows CE 5.0.  
PTX Connect VoIP.  
Optional Open TekTerm terminal emulation software: supports IBM 5250, IBM 3270,  
HP2392, ANSI, and TESS.  
•
Mobile Control Center (MCC) device management.  
7.1.3  
Wireless Communication  
Note: 802.11b/g, GSM, and Bluetooth are available simultaneously.  
Optional expansion modules for:  
•
•
802.11b/g (proprietary module) operating in the 2.4GHz band:  
- Supports IEEE 802.11b data rates of 1,2,5.5 and 11Mbps using Direct Sequence  
Spread Spectrum (DSSS).  
- Supports IEEE 802.11g data rates of 6,9,12,24,36,48 and 54Mbps,using Orthagonal  
Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) base band modulation.  
GSM/GPRS EDGE (via expansion interface):  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 7: Specifications  
Bar Code Applications (optional)  
- Quad-Band – 850/900/1800/1900 MHz.  
- Voice and Data.  
- GPRS Class B, Multi-Slot Class 12.  
- EGPRS Class B, Multi-Slot Class 12.  
UMTS:  
•
•
- UMTS/HSDPA: Triple band, 850/1900/2100 MHz.  
- GSM/GPRS/EDGE: Quad band, 850/900/1800/1900 MHz.  
- Audio: 1 analog interface.  
- USB supports a USB 2.0 Full Speed 12 Mbit/s device interface.  
Bluetooth class 2, ver 2.0:  
- Support Enhanced Data Rate (EDR) for up to 3Mbps data rate.  
- Support Advanced Frequency Hopping (AFH) for reduced interference with  
802.11b/g radio.  
7.1.4  
Bar Code Applications (optional)  
Note: All are user-upgradeable.  
•
•
•
Optional 1D EV15 imager (see specifications on page 260).  
Optional 2D SX5400 imager (see specifications on page 262).  
Optional 1D SE955 laser scanner (see specifications on page 259).  
7.1.5  
7.1.6  
Camera (optional)  
•
Colour 2 megapixel Fixed Focus with flash.  
Accessories  
•
•
Carrying accessories:  
- Hand strap with or without tether and stylus.  
- Carrying case, either functional or non-functional.  
- Soft shell holster.  
Communications:  
- Quad docking station with 10/100 BaseT Ethernet and charge functions.  
252  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 7: Specifications  
Approvals  
- Desktop docking station with Type A and Type B USB connectivity and charge func-  
tions for an internal battery along with a spare battery.  
- USB cable supports ActiveSync without requiring a docking station.  
Power supplies:  
•
•
- AC wall adaptor.  
- Automotive power adaptor.  
- Single-slot battery pack chargers.  
Vehicle peripherals:  
- Non-powered cradle.  
- RAM Mount with screws.  
7.1.7  
Approvals  
Safety:  
CSA/UL60950-1, IEC 60950-1, EN60950-1  
EMC:  
FCC Part 15 Class B  
EN 55022  
EN 55024  
EN 301 489  
Laser:  
IEC 60825-1, Class 2  
FDA 21 CFR 1040.10  
1040.11 Class II  
Bluetooth:  
RF:  
Ver 2  
Bluetooth and 802.11b/g: EN300 328, Part 15.247  
GSM/GPRS:  
EN301 511; EN50360/361, NAPRD03;  
3GPP51.010; FCC Parts 22 & 24; Industry Canada;  
RSS-132 & 133  
In-Vehicle Cradle:  
e Mark  
7.2  
Radio Specifications  
7.2.1  
802.11b/g WLAN Radio  
Form factor  
Proprietary module based on 16-bit CF interface  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
253  
         
Chapter 7: Specifications  
Siemens MC75 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio  
Antenna port  
Two Hirose U.FL connectors for both transmit and  
receive antenna diversity  
Antenna  
Two PCB slot antennas 2.1 dBi  
802.11b: 70mW (+18.5 dBm)  
802.11g: 30mW (+15 dBm)  
2.400 - 2.4897 GHz  
Transmit Power  
Frequency Range  
Channels  
FCC:  
11  
13  
13  
ETSI:  
TELEC:  
RX Sensitivity  
Data Rates  
-96dBm @ 1Mbps, -90dBm @ 11Mbps,  
-94dBm @ 6Mbps, -75dBm @ 54Mbps  
802.11g: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps  
802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps  
7.2.2  
Siemens MC75 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio  
Quad-Band GSM 850/900/1800/1900 MHz  
EDGE (E-GPRS) multi-slot class 12  
GPRS multi-slot class 12  
GSM release 99  
Output power:  
- Class 4 (2 W) for EGSM850  
- Class 4 (2 W) for EGSM900  
- Class 1 (1 W) for GSM1800  
- Class 1 (1 W) for GSM1900  
Control via AT commands  
(Hayes 3GPP TS 27.007 and 27.005)  
Internet Services:  
TCP, UDP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, POP3  
3.2 to 4.3 V  
Supply voltage range:  
Specifications for:  
EDGE data transmission:  
EDGE class 12: max 236.8 kbps (downlink)  
254  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 7: Specifications  
Siemens HC25 UMTS Modem  
Mobile station class B  
Modulation and coding scheme MCS 1-9  
GPRS class 12  
GPRS data transmission:  
CSD data transmission:  
Mobile station class B  
PBCCH support  
Coding schemes CS 1-4  
Up to 14.4 kbps  
V.110  
Non-transparent mode  
SMS:  
Point-to-point MO and MT  
Text and PDU mode  
Voice:  
Triple-rate codec for HR, FR, and EFR  
Adaptive multi-rate AMR  
Basic hands-free operation  
Echo cancellation  
Noise reduction  
Interfaces:  
Hirose U.FL-R-SMT 50 Ohms antenna connector  
Antenna solder pad  
Molex 80-pin board-to-board connector  
- Power supply  
- Audio: 2x analog, 1x digital  
- serial interface (ITU-T V.24 protocol)  
- SIM card interface 3 V, 1.8 V  
7.2.3  
Siemens HC25 UMTS Modem  
Frequency bands:  
UMTS/HSDPA: Triple band, 850//1900/2100MHz  
GSM/GPRS/EDGE: Quad band,  
850/900/1800/1900MHz  
GSM class:  
Small MS  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
255  
   
Chapter 7: Specifications  
Siemens HC25 UMTS Modem  
Output power (as per Release 99): Class 4 (+33dBm ±2dB) for EGSM850  
Class 4 (+33dBm ±2dB) for EGSM900  
Class 1 (+30dBm ±2dB) for GSM1800  
Class 1 (+30dBm ±2dB) for GSM1900  
Class E2 (+27dBm ± 3dB) for GSM 850 8-PSK  
Class E2 (+27dBm ± 3dB) for GSM 900 8-PSK  
Class E2 (+26dBm +3 /-4dB) for GSM 1800 8-PSK  
Class E2 (+26dBm +3 /-4dB) for GSM 1900 8-PSK  
Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 2100,  
WCDMA FDD BdI  
Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 1900,  
WCDMA FDD BdII  
Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 850,  
WCDMA FDD BdV  
RoHS:  
All hardware components fully compliant with EU  
RoHS Directive  
HSDPA features:  
UMTS features:  
3GPP Release 5, DL 3.6 Mbps, UL 384 kbps  
UE CAT. [1-6], 11, 12 supported  
3GPP Release 4, PS data rate – 384 kbps DL / 384  
kbps UL  
CS data rate – 64 kbps DL / 64 kbps UL  
GSM / GPRS / EGPRS features: Data transfer GPRS  
- Multislot Class 10  
- Full PBCCH support  
- Mobile Station Class B  
- Coding Scheme 1 – 4  
EGPRS  
- Multislot Class 10  
- EDGE E2 power class for 8 PSK  
256  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Specifications  
Siemens HC25 UMTS Modem  
- Downlink coding schemes – CS 1-4, MCS 1-9  
- Uplink coding schemes – CS 1-4, MCS 1-9  
-Uplink coding schemes – CS 1-4, MCS 1-9  
- BEP reporting  
- SRB loopback and test mode B  
- 8-bit, 11-bit RACH  
- PBCCH support  
- 1 phase / 2 phase access procedures  
- Link adaptation and IR  
- NACC, extended UL TBF  
- Mobile Station Class B  
CSD  
- V.110, RLP, non-transparent  
- 9.6 kbps  
SMS:  
Point-to-point MT and MO  
Text and PDU mode  
Audio:  
Audio speech codecs  
GSM: AMR, EFR, FR, HR  
3GPP: AMR  
DTMF supported  
CEPT and ANSI supervisory tones supported  
Software:  
Interfaces:  
AT commands AT-Hayes GSM 07.05 and 07.07,  
Siemens  
AT commands for RIL compatibility (NDIS/RIL)  
Microsoft™ compatibility RIL / NDIS for  
Windows Mobile™  
USB Supports a USB 2.0 Full Speed (12Mbit/s)  
device interface  
Audio: 1 analog interface  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
257  
Chapter 7: Specifications  
Bluetooth Radio  
UICC interface: Supported chip cards: SIM / UICC  
3V, 1.8V  
Antenna 50Ohms. External antenna can be con-  
nected via antenna connector or antenna pad (spring  
contact)  
Module interface 50-pin board-to-board connector  
7.2.4  
Bluetooth Radio  
Embedded (920 kbps serial interface)  
Bluetooth Version  
Ver 2.0 compliant (features Adaptive Frequency  
Hopping for better co-existence with 802.11 radio  
and Enhanced Data Rate (EDR) for up to 3Mbps  
data rate).  
Chip Antenna Gain  
Transmit Power  
1dBi peak  
-3dBm (0.5mW) minimum, +4dBm (2.5mW) max  
2.400–2.4835 GHz  
Frequency Range  
RX Sensitivity (BER<0.1%)  
Data Rate  
-80dBm max  
V1.2 = 732.2 kbps and 57.6 kbps asymmetric,  
433.9kbps symmetric  
V2.0 = 2 & 3Mbps  
7.3  
Lithium-Ion Battery 5000 mAh Specifications  
Description  
Model Number  
Specification  
CH3000  
Part Number  
Chemistry  
1081236 (NA and Canada); 1081506 (World)  
Lithium Ion (Li-Ion)  
Capacity  
5000 mAh nominal at 1000mA discharge 20°C to 3.0V (min)  
3.7V nominal (3.0V min. to 4.2V max.)  
2P1S (2 parallel connected cells)  
Voltage  
Cell Configuration  
258  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 7: Specifications  
Scanner/Imager Specifications  
Description  
Specification  
Max. charge voltage  
4.2V +/- 1%  
Recommended charge termina- 5.0 hr - charging must stop.  
tion timeout  
Charge Temperature  
Discharge Temperature  
Storage Temperature  
0°C to +40°C (32°F to +104°F)  
-20°C to +50°C (-4°F to +122°F)  
-20°C to +50°C (-4°F to +122 ºF). Storage at elevated tempera-  
tures not recommended.  
25°C (77 ºF)—recommended storage temperature.  
Cycle Life  
300 cycles minimum with no degradation below 80% of  
nominal capacity based on 1C charge / 1C discharge rates  
(to 3.0V) @ 25°C (77 ºF).  
7.4  
Scanner/Imager Specifications  
7.4.1  
SE 955HP Specifications  
Scan Angle  
47° ± 3° default / 35° ± 3° reduced  
Scan Rate  
104 (± 12) scans/sec (bi-directional)  
Scan Pattern  
Linear  
Wavelength  
650nm  
Input Voltage  
Input Current  
Standby Current  
Operating Temperature  
3.0-5.5 VDC ± 10%  
65 mA typical  
8 µA max  
-20° to 60° C  
-4° to 140°F  
Print Contrast  
Dimensions  
Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at 650 nm  
1.21 cm H x 2.16 cm W x 1.55 cm (max)  
0.47 in. H x 0.85 in. W x 0.61 in. D (max)  
Symbologies  
UPC/EAN, Code 128, Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5,  
Codabar, MSI Plessey  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
259  
     
Chapter 7: Specifications  
SE 955HP Decode Zone  
7.4.1.1 SE 955HP Decode Zone  
Decode Zone Typical  
4 mil  
1.0 in. – 5.5 in. / 2.54 cm – 13.97 cm  
1.25 in. – 8 in. / 3.18 cm – 20.32 cm  
1.5 in. – 13.25 in. / 3.81 cm – 33.66 cm  
1.5 in. – 17.5 in. / 3.81 cm – 44.45 cm  
1.5 in. – 23.5 in. / 3.81 cm – 59.69 cm  
1.5 in. – 29.5 in. / 3.81 cm – 74.93 cm  
1.75 in. – 35.5 in. / 4.45 cm – 90.17 cm  
* - 40 in. / * - 101.6 cm  
5 mil  
7.5 mil  
10 mil  
UPC 100%  
15 mil  
20 mil  
40 mil  
55 mil  
* - 55 in. / * - 139.7 cm  
* dependent on width of bar code  
7.4.2  
EV15 Imager Specifications  
Light Source  
Scan Angle  
617nm Highly Visible LED  
40º  
Minimum Print  
Contrast  
Minimum 25%  
Min x. Dimension  
Reading Distance  
Symbologies  
0.1 mm (4 mils)  
Up to 90cm (35 in)  
UPC (E&A), EAN, RSS, Code 39, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128,  
ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved, Matrix, Industrial and Standard 2 of 5,  
Codabar, Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI, Plessey, Telepen, PDF417,  
Micro PDF417  
Ambient Light  
Shock  
Works in any lighting conditions, from 0 to 100,000 lux  
2000G, 0.7ms, half sinus, 3 axes  
50G r.m.s  
Vibration  
260  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 7: Specifications  
EV15 Imager Decode Zone  
7.4.2.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone  
0 Lux to 100,000 Lux  
Minimum Range  
Inches  
Maximum Range  
Inches  
Mil Size  
5
2.5  
3
7
10  
14  
UPC  
20  
2
14.5  
22  
2.5  
3
40  
35.5  
High quality symbols in normal room light.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7: Specifications  
SX5400* Imager Specifications  
7.4.3  
SX5400* Imager Specifications  
Optical Resolution  
752H x 480V  
Field of view at 160mm  
120mm (H) x 78mm (V)  
41.1° (H) x 27.4° (V)  
Pitch angle  
Skew angle  
Ambient light  
±45°  
±45°  
0 to 100,000 lux (full sunlight)  
300 lux nominal  
Minimum contrast  
Targeting  
10%  
Intuitive range finding 626 nm LED  
Red LED (standard)  
Self Illumination  
Supply voltage  
Power supply  
Connectivity  
5 V ± 10%  
3.6 Volt DC nominal (2.7 - 5 Volts DC)  
USB 1.1 or serial async  
Connector to the interface  
board  
Molex 52892-1295 or HiRose FH12-12S-.5SH  
Symbologies supported  
Code 39; Code 39 Full ASCII; UPC-A, -A2, -A5; UPC-E, -E2,  
-E5; EAN-8 -13; JAN; I2of5; Code 128; Codabar/NW7;  
RSS 14, RSS Limited, RSS Expanded, RSS 14 Truncated,  
PDF417, microPDF417; Composite, CC-A, CC-B, CC-C;  
image capture, Data Matrix; QR Code; Maxicode; Aztec Code;  
Planet; Postnet; Royal Mail 4SCC; 4 State postal codes from  
Australia, Canada, Japan; Korean Post 3 of 5.  
*Formerly known as Symagery SX5400.  
262  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 7: Specifications  
SX5400 Imager Performance  
7.4.3.1 SX5400 Imager Performance  
The table below presents the typical performance of the SX5400 Imager at 300 lux  
(@ 160mm focus when using Grade A photographic-quality bar codes). Shown are the  
average near, far, and Depth of Reading (DOR) numbers.  
Size  
Near Avg.  
(inches)  
Far Avg.  
(inches)  
DOR Avg.  
(inches)  
Symbology  
C39  
(mil)  
7.5  
4.0  
7.0  
3.0  
6.5  
C39  
10  
2.75  
2.25  
4.0  
9.25  
11.0  
6.5  
C39  
15  
8.75  
2.5  
PDF6.6  
PDF10  
PDF15  
DM15  
QR15  
UPC  
6.6  
10  
3.25  
2.25  
3.0  
9.0  
5.75  
8.5  
15  
10.75  
8.0  
15  
5.0  
15  
3.75  
3.0  
7.5  
3.75  
6.5  
12.5  
9.5  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
263  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX A  
PORT PINOUTS  
A.1  
Docking Port Pinout  
Table A.1  
Pin #  
Direction Rela-  
Pin Name  
Signal  
DGND  
Comment  
tive To DPA  
1
2
3
GND  
-
VDD_EXT_PWR  
VDD_EXT_PWR  
VDD_EXT_PWR  
Input  
These 3 pins are  
connected  
together.  
4
5
6
7
8
VDD_EXT_PWR  
BATT_OUT  
AUDIO_P  
VDD_BATT_OUT Output  
Output  
Output  
Audio positive.  
Audio negative.  
AUDIO_N  
VDD_USBOTG  
Bi-directional  
USB Power  
(+5.5V).  
As output, sup-  
plies external  
devices when  
Ikôn is in USB  
Host mode.  
As input,  
charges battery  
when Ikôn is in  
USB Client  
mode.  
9
DOCK_ID  
Input  
Dock ID.  
10  
USB_OTG_DN  
Bi-directional  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix A: Port Pinouts  
Audio Port Pinout  
Table A.1  
Pin #  
Direction Rela-  
tive To DPA  
Pin Name  
Signal  
Comment  
11  
12  
13  
14  
USB_OTG_DP  
USB_OTG_ID  
GND  
Bi-directional  
Input  
-
DGND  
TXDATA  
Output  
RS-232 data  
transmit.  
Max bit rate  
115 kbits/sec.  
15  
RXDATA  
Input  
RS-232 data  
receive.  
Max bit rate  
115 kbits/sec.  
16  
GND  
DGND  
-
A.2  
Audio Port Pinout  
Table A.2  
Direction Relative  
To DPA  
Pin #  
Pin Name  
Comment  
1
HPR  
Output  
Headphone output.  
2
3
4
5
6
HP_DETECT  
N/C  
Input  
-
Not connected.  
Microphone.  
Not connected.  
Ground.  
MIC  
Input  
N/C  
-
-
DGND  
A-2  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A: Port Pinouts  
DC IN Port Pinout  
A.3  
A.4  
DC IN Port Pinout  
Table A.3  
Pin #  
Signal  
Comment  
Side contact.  
1
DGND  
DGND  
2
3
Side contact.  
VDD_ACDC  
Center contact pin.  
Battery 5000 mAh (CH3000): Contact Pinout  
Table A.4  
PIN #  
Signal Name  
BATT-RAW  
DESCRIPTION  
1
-
Positive lead of battery.  
Plastic Rip - provides mechanical polarity.  
Positive lead of battery.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
BATT-RAW  
BATT-CLK  
BATT-THERM  
BATT-DATA  
GND  
SMBus data clock.  
Thermistor 10K NTC.  
SMBus bi-directional data line.  
Negative lead of battery.  
Negative lead of battery.  
GND  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX B  
WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK (WWAN)  
B.1 Wireless WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
B.1.1 Taskbar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
B.1.2 Establishing A Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
B.1.2.1 Disconnecting From A Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
B.1.2.2 Shutting Down The Wireless WAN User Interface . . . . . . . . . . 6  
B.1.3 Advanced Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
B.1.3.1 Entering A PIN Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
B.1.3.2 Error States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
B.1.4 Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
B.1.4.1 Data Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
B.1.4.2 Security Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
B.1.4.3 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
B.1.4.4 Driver Mode Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
B.1.4.5 Modem Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
B.1.4.6 User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
B.1.5 SMS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
B.1.5.1 New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
B.1.5.2 Inbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
B.1.5.3 Outbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
B.1.5.4 SMS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
B.1.6 Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
B.2 Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-1  
   
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Wireless WAN  
B.1  
Wireless WAN  
Psion Teklogix offers a quad band, GPRS radio—Model No. RA3030-G2; an Ikôn Rugged  
PDA equipped with a GSM/GPRS radio has wide area networking capabilities. With this  
radio and a SIM card, you can wirelessly transfer data, and you use the Ikôn voice option to  
place phone calls.  
B.1.1  
Taskbar Icons  
Wireless WAN icons in the taskbar indicate the status of your wide area network connection.  
Note that these icons are only visible when a GSM/GPRS radio is installed in the computer,  
and the interface is enabled.  
The letter in the signal strength icon (G for GSM/GPRS) indicates that a packet data service  
is available and initialized. Keep in mind that the signal strength icon is displayed without a  
letter if packet data service is not available or if it is available but not yet initialized.  
User interaction is required (e.g. the user is required to enter a PIN).  
A non-recoverable (fatal) error has occurred.  
The modem status is unknown or the modem is not connected to any network (the signal  
strength is 0%).  
The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 1% and 20%.  
The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 21% and 40%.  
The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 41% and 60%.  
The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 61% and 80%.  
The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 81% and 100%.  
A GPRS packet data connection is active, the signal strength is between 41% and 60% and  
GSM/GPRS packet service is available.  
The signal strength icon is replaced by a connection indicator icon when a packet data con-  
nection is started.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-3  
     
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Establishing A Connection  
A GPRS packet data connection is active.  
In addition to the signal strength or connection indicator a second icon may be shown.  
A new SMS (Short Message Service) message has arrived.  
The dialer icon is displayed when the Voice option is available (SIM card and GPRS radio  
are installed). When you have an active call, this icon flashes yellow and then green.  
B.1.2  
Establishing A Connection  
To display the main Wireless WAN dialog box:  
•
Double-tap on the Wireless WAN icon in the taskbar.  
If the icon is not visible in the taskbar, the radio interface has been shut down or the modem  
has been removed:  
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Wireless WAN icon.  
Figure B.1 Wireless WAN Icon  
The main Wireless WAN dialog box is displayed.  
B-4  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Establishing A Connection  
Figure B.2 Establishing A Connection  
Note: If you are prompted to enter a PIN, refer to“Entering A PIN Number” on page B-6  
for details.  
When “Ready to connect” is displayed in the Status field, the Connect Data button  
is enabled.  
•
Tap on the Connect Data button.  
The progress of the connection is tracked in the Status field.  
•
•
•
•
PPP link to modem active.  
Authenticating user.  
User authenticated.  
Connected.  
Note: Keep in mind that these states may be displayed fairly quickly if the progress of the  
connection is rapid.  
When the connection state reaches PPP link to modem active, the taskbar icon changes to in-  
dicate an active connection. The Connect Data button changes to Disconnect.  
B.1.2.1 Disconnecting From A Network  
To disconnect from the network:  
•
Tap the stylus on the Disconnect button, and then on OK.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-5  
 
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Advanced Information  
When the computer’s network connection is severed, the Status field displays “Ready  
to connect”.  
The signal strength is displayed in the main Wireless WAN screen, even while a connection  
is active. The Rx bytes and Tx bytes fields estimate the amount of data transmitted and  
received, respectively.  
B.1.2.2 Shutting Down The Wireless WAN User Interface  
While it is not usual to shut down the GSM/GPRS user interface, you can accomplish this  
by tapping on the File menu and choosing the Exit command at the bottom of the main  
Wireless WAN dialog box.  
Note: Once you’ve shut down the user interface, you can only enable the radio by opening  
the Control Panel and tapping on the Wireless WAN icon to display the Wireless  
WAN dialog box.  
B.1.3  
Advanced Information  
In most cases, when a GSM/GPRS radio and SIM are installed in your computer, setup is  
automatic. Follow the steps outlined under the heading “Establishing A Connection” on  
page B-4 to make a connection. The information in this section is for advanced  
setup purposes.  
B.1.3.1 Entering A PIN Number  
If a PIN is required, a PIN entry dialog box is displayed.  
•
Type your PIN, and press [ENTER].  
Note: If you exceed the number of allowable attempts, a PUK entry window is brought to  
the foreground. You’ll need to enter a new PIN number.  
Once the correct PIN or PUK is entered or if none was required, the modem is instructed to  
perform a GSM network registration followed by a GPRS attach. The main Wireless WAN  
dialog box reflects the progress of the initialization.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Searching for modem.  
Initializing modem.  
SIM is ready.  
Searching for network.  
Registered on network.  
Searching for GPRS.  
B-6  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Advanced Information  
•
Ready to connect.  
If the modem loses the connection to the GSM network, the following states are repeated:  
Searching for network, Registered on network, Searching for packet data, and Ready  
to connect.  
B.1.3.2 Error States  
The following temporary error states (i.e., these states may disappear without interaction)  
may be displayed:  
•
Emergency calls only.  
The modem has found a network but is not allowed to register (e.g. no roaming agree-  
ment between networks). The modem keeps searching for another network.  
•
•
•
No network found.  
A network is not currently available. The modem continues searching for a network.  
Packet data not available.  
The current network does not support a packet data service.  
Packet data not allowed.  
The modem is not allowed to use the packet data service on the current network (e.g. no  
GPRS roaming agreement between network; a roaming agreement for voice may still be  
in place). It is also possible that you do not have a subscription for GPRS at all.  
The remaining error states are permanent:  
•
SIM is missing.  
The SIM card is missing. After the SIM has been inserted a warm boot may be required.  
SIM failure.  
•
The SIM card is permanently disabled (e.g. because the wrong PUK has been entered  
too many times). A new SIM is needed.  
•
•
Modem failure.  
The modem did not respond to commands as expected. If a warm boot does not clear  
this condition, the modem may need to be replaced.  
NDIS error.  
An internal software error has occurred. If a warm boot does not clear this condition,  
Psion Teklogix technical support may need to investigate further.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-7  
 
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Tools Menu  
B.1.4  
Tools Menu  
The Tools menu in the main Wireless WAN dialog box offers some additional, advanced  
setup features.  
B.1.4.1 Data Configuration  
Enable Automatic Connect  
If the Enable automatic connect checkbox is checked (unchecked by default), the Wireless  
WAN user interface will attempt to establish a GPRS connection whenever GPRS is avail-  
able (e.g. after resume from suspend without further user interaction).  
B-8  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Tools Menu  
To activate the automatic connection mode:  
Tap on the OK button.  
•
While automatic connection mode is enabled, the Connect Data button in the main Wireless  
LAN dialog box changes to Disable Auto. To close the currently active connection (if any)  
and disable the automatic connection mode:  
•
Tap on Disable Auto.  
Important: Automatic connection mode should not be used if applications other than  
the Wireless WAN user interface (e.g. Connection Manager) are expected  
to open and close connections.  
If the automatic connection mode is enabled and another application closes  
the GPRS connection, the WWAN user interface will immediately try to re-  
establish the connection.  
Use Virtual Serial Port  
If Use virtual serial port is enabled, packet data connections are established through the  
virtual serial port of the WWAN driver rather than through the WWAN driver directly.  
This checkbox should only be checked if certain third-party VPN (Virtual Private Network)  
clients are used that do not work correctly otherwise. The default setting is disabled  
(unchecked).  
Note: The connection setup takes longer through the virtual serial port.  
Enable Automatic Configuration  
In most cases, the data connection is configured automatically and no user interaction is re-  
quired. This is true even if multiple SIM cards from different operators are used with the  
same device. The connection parameters are adjusted automatically when a new SIM card is  
detected (this may require a warm boot). The connection parameters are retrieved from  
a database.  
Manual configuration should be necessary only if:  
•
One or more parameters in the database are incorrect or a new operator is not yet in the  
database. (The database should be corrected for subsequent software releases.)  
•
•
An operator has assigned individual GPRS user names and passwords.  
A very large site has their own APN. Such connections always have to be  
configured manually.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-9  
 
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Tools Menu  
•
A customer has subscribed for a static IP address. By definition this must be  
configured manually.  
Profiles  
In the following section, all the parameters that need to be configured for a connection (such  
as APN, user name, password, DNS server addresses etc.) are referred to as a ‘profile’.  
Every profile is identified by an arbitrary, unique name. The profile named Default is special  
in that it is always present and can neither be edited nor deleted. The Default profile uses pa-  
rameters from a built-in database. The home network (the network that issued the SIM) is  
used for the database look-up. While there can be many configured profiles, only one profile  
can be active at any time.  
If connection profiles are configured manually, the Enable automatic configuration check-  
box should normally be unchecked.  
In one particular use case, manually configured profiles may be combined with automatic  
configuration. If multiple SIM cards are used with the same device, each SIM card being  
from a different operator and some or all of them requiring a manually set up profile, auto-  
matic configuration may be used to automatically pick the correct manually configured  
profile for each SIM card. For this to work, each profile must be configured while the corre-  
sponding SIM card is inserted in the device and initialized (i.e. the status is at least SIM  
is ready).  
The Select profile: drop-down list in the data configuration profile selects to which profile a  
subsequent action applies. A profile named Default is always present and contains the  
current parameters from the database. The following actions are available:  
Show  
The parameters for the selected profile are displayed when you tap the stylus on this button.  
For the Default profile, the publicly known password is shown—otherwise, the password  
is hidden.  
Edit  
The parameters of the selected profile can be edited when you choose the Edit button. Keep  
in mind that you cannot edit the Default profile.  
Delete  
The selected profile is deleted. You cannot delete the Default profile.  
Activate  
When this button is chosen, the selected profile becomes the active profile. Activation is  
possible only if the Enable automatic configuration: checkbox is unchecked.  
B-10 Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Tools Menu  
New  
Tapping on the New button allows you to create a new profile.  
Figure B.3 Creating A New Profile  
The name of the newly created profile must be different from all existing profiles. Also, the  
name cannot be Default. When the New Data Profile dialog box is opened, a proposal for a  
unique name is filled in the corresponding entry field. If a manually configured profile has a  
secret password and unauthorized access to the device is a concern even after the SIM PIN  
has been entered, the password should not be entered in the New Data Profile dialog box  
and the Prompt user for password checkbox should be checked instead. In this case, you will  
be prompted for the password each time a connection is initiated (the Connect Data button  
in the main Wireless WAN dialog box is selected). If Force PAP authentication (Password  
Authentication Protocol) is enabled, a simple authentication protocol is used to authenticate  
a user to a remote access server or Internet Service Provider.  
Reset  
The Reset button in the New Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes resets all entry fields to  
the values they had when the dialog box was opened.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-11  
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Tools Menu  
Advanced IP  
Figure B.4 Assigning IP Information  
The Advanced IP button in the Show Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes opens another  
dialog box that allows you to configure a static IP address as well providing DNS and WINS  
fields so that you can specify DNS and WINS resolvers.  
B.1.4.2 Security Configuration  
The Security Configuration dialog box is accessed through the Tools menu. The Security  
Configuration dialog box allows you to enable, disable and change the PIN. You will need  
the current PIN to make any of these changes. The PIN must be enabled in order to be  
changed. (If the PIN is disabled, the New PIN entry field is greyed out.)  
Note: Keep in mind that some network operators do not allow the SIM PIN to be disabled.  
A new PIN must consist of 4 to 8 numeric digits.  
The Require PIN on resume checkbox is independent of the aforementioned settings. By de-  
fault, this checkbox is unchecked. While this option remains unchecked, any PIN entered on  
startup or through the Security Configuration dialog box and submitted successfully to the  
modem is stored in memory for as long as the device is not rebooted. This stored PIN is then  
used without further user interaction whenever the modem requires a PIN (such as resume  
B-12 Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Tools Menu  
after suspend or modem removal). The stored PIN is also automatically entered in the  
Current PIN text box whenever the Security Configuration dialog box is called up.  
If unauthorized access to the device is a concern, the Require PIN on resume checkbox  
should be checked. In this case, the PIN is not stored; whenever a PIN is required, you will  
be prompted to enter an appropriate value.  
B.1.4.3 Network Configuration  
In the main Wireless WAN window:  
Tap on the Tools menu, and choose Network.  
•
By default the GSM radio modem automatically chooses from the available and allowed  
networks (allowed networks are the home network and all other networks with which the  
home network has a roaming agreement). You may find there are some situations in which  
you want to override this default behaviour. For example, you may want to disable roaming  
if you find yourself in a border area where the home network is not available but a foreign  
roaming partner is available. Abroad, you may find that an available network does not have  
GPRS roaming agreements. In this case, you’ll need to manually select the network which  
you know to support GPRS roaming.  
Automatic network selection is enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking Enable auto-  
matic network select in the Network dialog box. When automatic network selection is  
disabled, you must select a network manually.  
Available networks can also be viewed without changing any settings. Scanning for avail-  
able networks is a lengthy operation—a progress bar is shown while the scan is active. For  
every network that is found, the network name, country, status and numeric network identi-  
fier (MCC/MNC, Mobile Country Code followed by the Mobile Network Code)  
is displayed.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-13  
 
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Tools Menu  
Note: Your home network operator will need to let you know which other networks have  
roaming agreements. Even when a network is listed with an ‘Available’ status, it  
does not necessarily follow that it can be used or that the roaming agreement covers  
GPRS.  
A status of ‘Forbidden’ indicates that the network cannot be used. If you choose a  
network that is not covered by a roaming agreement, the status in the main WWAN  
dialog box changes to ‘Emergency calls only’, ‘No network found’, ‘GPRS not  
available’ or ‘GPRS not allowed’.  
B.1.4.4 Driver Mode Configuration  
By default, the Wireless WAN driver is enabled (the Enable driver checkbox is checked).  
The driver must be disabled in order to use the modem for anything other than GPRS (e.g.  
dial-up data, fax, or in order to manually submit AT commands to the modem for develop-  
ment, testing, approvals, etc.). If the Enable driver checkbox is not checked, the driver is  
shut down as soon as the OK button in the Driver Mode dialog box is chosen.  
If, on the other hand, the Wireless WAN driver is not running and the Enable driver check-  
box is checked, the Wireless WAN driver is started as soon the Driver Mode dialog box is  
closed using the OK button.  
Note: When the driver is not running, no network status or signal strength can  
be displayed.  
Since all currently supported GSM modems are automatically detected, the Enable auto-  
matic port detection checkbox should always be checked. If this checkbox is not checked, a  
serial port can be selected manually. This experimental feature allows the driver to be used  
with an internal GSM modem that was not recognized by the automatic detection or an ex-  
ternal GSM modem connected to a serial port of the computer through USB or through  
B-14 Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Tools Menu  
Bluetooth. An external modem connected to a serial port must support 115.2kbit/s, 8bit, no  
parity and hardware flow control.  
B.1.4.5 Modem Information  
The fields in this dialog box cannot be edited, they only display information about the com-  
puter’s modem. If the network operator has not programmed a user’s phone number into his  
SIM, the Phone: field remains empty. If the main menu shows an error status, at least partial  
modem information may be available.  
B.1.4.6 User Interface  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-15  
   
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Tools Menu  
Taskbar  
Choosing Taskbar displays a dialog box in which you can determine which Wireless WAN  
icons will be displayed in the taskbar.  
Sounds  
Tapping on the Sounds option displays a dialog box in which you can customize which  
sounds your Ikôn will emit and when these sounds will be played.  
B-16 Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
SMS Menu  
B.1.5  
SMS Menu  
SMS (Short Message Service) functions are accessed through the SMS menu. For modems  
that support a SIM card, the SIM initialization typically takes longer than the network ini-  
tialization, resulting in a noticeable delay before the SMS functions become available.  
B.1.5.1 New  
Tapping on the New button opens a dialog for sending a new SMS message. The recipient's  
phone number (to be entered in the To: field) can consist of the digits 0 through 9, as well as  
the * and # characters, optionally preceded by one + character, indicating an international  
number (i.e. the country code follows immediately after the + character).  
By checking the Store message in Outbox field a new message can be stored in the Outbox  
before being sent. If no storage space is available, or the modem does not support the storage  
of outgoing messages, then this checkbox is disabled.  
B.1.5.2 Inbox  
Tapping on the Inbox button opens the list of received messages. Reading 50 messages, for  
example, from the SIM can take about 30 seconds. By default the list of messages is sorted  
with the most recently received message first. The list can be sorted by any other column by  
clicking on the corresponding column heading. Clicking the same column heading twice re-  
verses the sort order. Pressing any letter or digit moves the highlight to the next message  
whose address begins with that letter or number.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-17  
     
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Voice  
Note: The date and time formats can be changed through the Region and Language menu  
in Control Panel. For a new date or time format to take effect the Inbox has to be  
closed and re-opened.  
The Open button opens the selected message in a new window such that the entire message  
can be read including the original formatting (line breaks are replaced by spaces in the Inbox  
message list). Pressing the Reply button opens the new message dialog as described above,  
except the destination phone number is filled in already.  
B.1.5.3 Outbox  
Tapping on the Outbox button opens the list of sent messages. Otherwise the Outbox  
behaves exactly as the Inbox described above. The date and time when a message was sent  
is not available for GSM modems.  
B.1.5.4 SMS Configuration  
Tapping on the SMS Configuration button opens the SMS configuration dialog. The SMS  
Centre address follows the same rules as the recipient's phone number in the New message  
dialog. The message validity period parameter is sent to the SMS Centre with each message  
sent subsequently and instructs the SMS Centre on how long it should attempt to deliver the  
message to the recipient (the SMS Centre may impose an upper limit on the validity period  
regardless of the setting).  
Note: Only certain discrete validity period values can be sent and thus the validity period  
is rounded to the nearest allowed value. The next time the SMS configuration dialog  
is opened the rounded value is shown.  
The user interface tries to keep the SMS storage location available for a new incoming  
message if the Delete oldest message when full checkbox is checked. In this case, when a  
new message arrives and the SMS storage becomes full, the oldest received message is de-  
leted. If any string is entered as the Message Suppression Prefix, then messages beginning  
with that string will not be shown in either the Inbox or Outbox. In this way messages in-  
tended for another application running on the same device can be hidden from the user, as  
long as those messages begin with the string configured here.  
B.1.6  
Voice  
The Voice tab is described in detail under “Voice – Using The Phone Dialer” on page 20.  
B-18 Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix B: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)  
Power Mode  
B.2  
Power Mode  
The power mode of the modem is controlled through the Power menu in the Control Panel  
(not through the Wireless WAN user interface).  
For CF Card modems, the settings are found under the Devices tab. If the checkbox for a  
modem is unchecked then no power is applied to the modem and no driver is loaded (neither  
the serial port driver nor the Wireless WAN driver). If the checkbox is checked then power is  
applied to the modem and the drivers are loaded when the computer is turned on. You can  
choose how long power is applied for WWAN and whether it turns off on Suspend (see “De-  
vices” on page 104.)  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-19  
   
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX C  
SCU FOR 802.11B/G RADIO  
C.1 SCU Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
C.1.1 Main Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
C.1.2 Profile Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
C.1.3 Status Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
C.1.4 Diags Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
C.1.2.1 SCU Security Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
C.1.2.2 SCU EAP Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
C.1.2.3 EAP Credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
C.1.2.4 ThirdPartyConfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
C.1.5 Global Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-1  
     
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: SCU For 802.11b/g Radio  
SCU Tabs  
C.1  
SCU Tabs  
This appendix provides details about each tab in the Summit Client Utility (SCU). For  
quick, step-by-step setup instructions, refer to “Configuring The Summit 802.11b/g” on  
page 13.  
The following sections provide a detailed description of each of the tabs available in the  
SCU—Main (below), Profile (page C-4), Status (page C-9), Diags (page C-9), and Global  
(page C-10).  
C.1.1 Main Tab  
The Main tab is displayed when you tap on the Start>Programs>SCU icon.  
•
•
Enable/Disable Radio: Enables or disables the radio. This is a toggle button; when the  
radio is enabled, this button reads Disable Radio, and when the radio is disabled, the  
button reads Enable Radio.  
Active Profile: Lists the name(s) of the active configuration profile(s). When a profile  
is chosen from the Active Profile drop-down menu, the settings for that profile become  
active.  
If ThirdPartyConfig is selected, after the Ikôn goes through a power cycle, WZC is used  
for configuration of the radio. See “ThirdPartyConfig” on page C-8 for details.  
•
•
•
Radio Type: Indicates the type of radio installed in the device, e.g. “BG” when an  
802.11b/g radio is installed.  
Reg. Domain: Indicates the regulatory domain (e.g. ETSI, FCC or TELEC) for which  
the radio is configured. “Worldwide” means that the radio can be used in any domain.  
Status: Indicates if the radio is associated to an access point. If this is not the case,  
Status indicates the radio status.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-3  
     
Appendix C: SCU For 802.11b/g Radio  
Profile Tab  
•
•
Driver and SCU: These fields display the version of the device driver and the SCU that  
are running on the Ikôn.  
About SCU: This box provides details about the SCU software.  
C.1.2 Profile Tab  
The Profile tab allows you to define radio and security settings that are stored in the registry  
as part of the configuration profile.  
The profile you create and save is listed in the Active Profile drop-down menu in the Main  
tab. You can define up to 20 profiles.  
Radio  
Attributes  
•
Edit Profile: Used to choose the profile to be viewed or edited. If ThirdPartyConfig is  
chosen, after the Ikôn goes through a power cycle, WZC is used for configuration of  
the radio.  
•
•
•
•
New: Allows you to create a new profile with default settings and assign it a name.  
Rename: Allows you to assign a profile name.  
Delete: Deletes the profile unless it is currently active.  
Scan: Opens a new window which displays a list of available access points with their  
respective SSIDs, Signal Strength (RSSI value) and Security Status. Selecting an AP  
returns you to the profile page and populates a new profile with the information availa-  
ble from the scan to simplify setting up a new profile.  
•
•
Radio: Lists radio attributes. These attributes can be individually chosen from this  
menu. When an attribute is chosen, an associated list of options is displayed where you  
can assign new settings or view existing settings.  
Commit: Saves all changes.  
C-4  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C: SCU For 802.11b/g Radio  
Profile Tab  
The following table describes the options in the Radio attributes, Encryption, and EAP Type  
drop-down menus:  
Table C.1 Radio, Encryption, And EAP Menus  
Radio  
Description  
Value  
Default  
Attribute  
SSID  
Service set identifier (SSID) for  
Maximum of 32 characters.  
None  
WLAN to which the radio connects.  
Client  
Name  
Name assigned to radio & Ikôn into Maximum of 16 characters.  
which it is installed.  
None  
Fast  
Power Save Power save mode for radio.  
CAM: Constantly awake.  
Maximum: Maximum power sav-  
ings.  
Fast: Fast power save mode.  
Tx Power  
Bit Rate  
Maximum transmit power.  
Max: Maximum defined for  
current regulatory domain.  
Measured in mW: 50,30,10, 1.  
Max  
Used by radio when interacting  
with WLAN access point.  
Auto: Rate automatically negoti- Auto  
ated with access point.  
Rates in Mbps: 1, 2, 5.5, 6.9 11,  
12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54.  
Radio  
Mode  
Used by 802.11g when interacting  
with access point.  
B rates only: 1, 2, 5.5, & 11 Mbps. BG rates  
G rates only: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, optimized  
48, and 54 Mbps.  
BG rates full: All B and G rates.  
BG rates optimized: 1, 2, 5.5, 6,  
11, 24, 36 & 54 Mbps.  
Auth Type 802.11 authentication type used  
Open, shared-key, or LEAP (Net- Open  
when associating with access point. work-EAP).  
EAP Type  
Extensible Authentication Protocol None, LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP- None  
type used for 802.1X authentica-  
tion to access point.  
MSCHAP  
– To use EAP-TLS, you must  
use WZC.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
C-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix C: SCU For 802.11b/g Radio  
Profile Tab  
Table C.1 Radio, Encryption, And EAP Menus  
Radio  
Attribute  
Description  
Value  
Default  
Credentials Authentication credentials for the  
selected EAP type.  
User: Username or Domain/User- None  
name (up to 64 characters).  
Refer to “EAP Credentials” on  
page C-7.  
Password: up to 64 characters.  
For PEAP: CA Cert–CA server  
certificate filename.  
Encryption Type of encryption used to protect  
transmitted data.  
None, Manual WEP, Auto WEP  
(generated during EAP authenti-  
cation), WPA PSK, WPA TKIP,  
WPA2 PSK, WPA2 TKIP, WPA2  
AES, CCKM TKIP.  
None  
For Manual WEP: Up to four  
static WEP keys.  
For PSK: ASCII passphrase or  
hex PSK.  
•
EAP-Type & Encryption: Security settings. These settings allow you to enhance the  
security of data across the wireless LAN. Refer to “EAP Credentials” on page C-7 and  
‘SCU Security Capabilities’ below, for details about these settings.  
C.1.2.1 SCU Security Capabilities  
The SCU provides integrated security to protect transmitted data as well as the Ikôn and  
wireless WAN infrastructure that transmit and receive data.  
A foundational element of the IEEE 802.11i WLAN security standard is IEEE 802.1X and a  
critical application on a mobile device is an 802.1X supplicant. This supplicant provides an  
interface between the radio and the operating system and supports the authentication and en-  
cryption elements required for 802.11i, also known as Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 (WPA2), as  
well as predecessors such as WPA and WEP. Summit software includes an integrated suppli-  
cant that supports a broad range of security capabilities, including:  
•
802.1X authentication using pre-shared keys or an EAP type, required for WPA2 and  
WPA.  
•
Data encryption and decryption using WPA2 AES, WPA TKIP or WEP.  
Common EAP types include:  
•
EAP-TLS: Uses the same technology as a follow-on to Secure Socket Layer (SSL). It  
provides strong security, but relies on client certificates for user authentication.  
C-6  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix C: SCU For 802.11b/g Radio  
Profile Tab  
•
PEAP: Provides secure user authentication by using a TLS tunnel to encrypt EAP traf-  
fic. Two different inner methods are used with PEAP:  
- EAP-MSCHAPV2, resulting in PEAP-MSCHAP: This is appropriate for use against  
Windows Active Directory and domains.  
- EAP-GTC, resulting in PEAP-GTC: This is for authentication with one-time pass-  
words (OTPs) against OTP databases such as SecureID.  
•
•
LEAP: Is an authentication method for use with Cisco WLAN access points. LEAP  
does not require the use of server or client certificates. LEAP supports Windows Active  
Directory and domains but requires the use of strong passwords to avoid vulnerability to  
offline dictionary attacks.  
EAP-FAST: Is a successor to LEAP and does not require strong passwords to protect  
against offline dictionary attacks. Like LEAP, EAP-FAST does not require the use of  
server or client certificates and supports Windows Active Directory and domains.  
Note: PEAP and EAP-TLS require the use of Windows facilities for the configuration of  
digital certificates.  
C.1.2.2 SCU EAP Types  
The following EAP types are supported by the integrated supplicant and can be configured  
in SCU: PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC, LEAP and EAP-FAST. With each of these four  
types, if authentication credentials are not stored in the profile, you will be prompted to enter  
credentials the first time the radio attempts to associate to an access point that supports  
802.1X (EAP).  
Consider the following when configuring one of the EAP types:  
•
•
•
PEAP-GTC: SCU supports static (login) passwords only.  
LEAP: Strong passwords are recommended.  
EAP-FAST: SCU supports automatic, not manual, PAC provisioning.  
EAP-TLS will work with an 802.11b/g radio module when Windows Zero Config (WZC)  
rather than the SCU is used to configure the type. With WZC, the native Windows supplicant  
instead of the SCU integrated supplicant is used.  
C.1.2.3 EAP Credentials  
Keep the following in mind when defining security settings:  
•
If the credentials specified in the profile are incorrect and that profile is used, the  
authentication fails without an error message; you will not be prompted to enter  
correct credentials.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
C-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix C: SCU For 802.11b/g Radio  
Profile Tab  
•
•
If the credentials are not specified in the profile, when the radio tries to associate using  
that profile, you will be prompted to enter the credentials.  
When prompted, you can enter valid credentials, enter invalid credentials, or cancel  
the operation.  
- If you enter valid credentials and tap OK, the radio will associate and authenticate.  
- If you enter invalid credentials and tap on OK, the radio will associate but will not  
authenticate; you will be prompted again to enter credentials.  
- If you tap on Cancel or clear the credentials fields and tap on OK, the radio will not  
attempt to associate with that profile until you perform one of the following actions  
(while the profile is the active profile):  
- Cause the Ikôn to go through a power cycle or suspend/resume.  
- Disable and enable the radio, or tap the Reconnect button on the Diags windows.  
- Modify the Profile, and tap on Commit.  
Alternatively, you can choose another profile as the active profile and then switch back to  
the profile for which EAP authentication was cancelled.  
C.1.2.4 ThirdPartyConfig  
If you choose to configure ThirdPartyConfig, the SCU will work with the operating sys-  
tem’s Windows Zero Config (WZC) to configure radio and security settings for the CF radio  
installed in the unit.  
Choosing this profile means that WZC must be used to define the following radio and secu-  
rity options: SSID, Auth Type, EAP Type, and Encryption.The SCU settings for  
ThirdPartyConfig include: Client Name, Power Save, Tx Power, Bit Rate, and Radio Mode.  
These SCU settings along with SCU global settings and the WZC settings will be applied to  
the radio module.  
C-8  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix C: SCU For 802.11b/g Radio  
Status Tab  
C.1.3 Status Tab  
The Status tab provides status information including IP address and MAC address for the  
client radio, IP address and MAC address for the AP, signal strength, channel, transmit  
power and data rate.  
C.1.4 Diags Tab  
Ping Address  
Ping Results  
Use the Diags tab as a troubleshooting tool. The functions are as follows:  
•
(Re)Connect: Enables/Disables the radio, applies/reapplies current profile and tries to  
associate and authenticate to the wireless LAN, logging all activity in the output area at  
bottom of the dialog box.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-9  
       
Appendix C: SCU For 802.11b/g Radio  
Global Tab  
•
•
Release/Renew: Obtains a new IP address through DHCP and logs all activity in the  
output area.  
Start Ping: Starts a continuous ping to the address in the text box next to this button.  
This is a toggle button so when you tap on it, it changes to Stop Ping. Closing this  
window or tapping on another button also stops the ping.  
•
Diagnostics: Attempts to connect or reconnect to an AP, and provides a more detailed  
dump of data than if you used (Re)connect. The dump includes the radio state, profile  
settings, global settings and BSSID list of APs. The SCU is saved to a file called  
_sdc_diag.txt in the Windows directory.  
C.1.5 Global Tab  
C-10 Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C: SCU For 802.11b/g Radio  
Global Tab  
The Global settings tab allows you to define radio and security settings that apply to all pro-  
files, along with settings that apply specifically to the SCU. The Global settings in the table  
below can be edited in SCU:  
Table C.2 Global Tab  
Global Setting  
Description  
Value  
Default  
Roam Trigger  
If RSSI from AP is less than roam  
dBm: -50, -55, -60, -65, -75  
trigger value, radio performs roam scan -70, -75, Custom  
or probes for an AP with stronger  
signal.  
Roam Delta  
Roam Period  
Amount by which second AP’s RSSI  
dBm: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 10  
must exceed the moving average RSSI 30, 35, Custom  
for the current AP before the radio will  
attempt to roam to a second AP.  
Following an association or roam scan Seconds: 5, 10, 15, 20, 10  
(with no roam), the number of seconds 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50,  
the radio collects RSSI scan data before 55, 60, Custom  
considering roaming.  
BG Channel Set Defines the 2.4 GHz channels to be  
scanned when the radio is set to roam  
and needs to determine what APs are  
available.  
Full (all channels)  
1, 6, 11  
1, 7, 13  
Full  
Custom  
DFS Channels  
Reserved  
Off, On  
Off  
On  
Aggressive Scan When this setting is On and the current Off, On  
connection to an AP becomes unrelia-  
ble, the radio scans for available APs  
more aggressively. Aggressive scan-  
ning complements and works in con-  
junction with the standard scanning  
that is configured through the Roam  
Trigger, Roam Delta, and Roam Period  
settings. It is recommended that  
Aggressive Scan is left On unless there  
is significant co-channel interference  
because of overlapping coverage from  
APs on the same channel.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-11  
Appendix C: SCU For 802.11b/g Radio  
Global Tab  
Table C.2 Global Tab  
Global Setting  
Description  
Value  
Default  
CCX features  
Activates three CCX features: AP-  
assisted roaming, AP-specified  
maximum transmit power and  
radio management.  
Optimized, Full, Off  
Optimized  
WMM  
Use Wi-Fi Multimedia Extensions, also On, Off  
know as WMM.  
Off  
TX Diversity  
Defines how to handle antenna diver-  
sity when transmitting data to AP.  
-Main only: Use main  
antenna only.  
Main only  
-Aux only: Use auxil-  
iary antenna only.  
-On: Use diversity.  
RX Diversity  
Defines how to handle antenna diver-  
sity when receiving data from AP.  
-On-Start on Main: On On-Start on  
startup, use main  
antenna.  
Main  
-On-Start on Aux: On  
startup, use auxiliary  
antenna.  
-Main only: Use main  
antenna only.  
-Aux only: Use auxil-  
iary antenna only.  
Frag Thresh  
RTS Thresh  
Packet is fragmented when packet size Integer from 256 to  
2346  
2347  
(in bytes) exceeds threshold.  
2346.  
Packet size above which RTS/CTS is  
required on link.  
An integer from 0 to  
2347.  
LED  
Available only with MCF10G.  
Enables the System Tray icon.  
On, Off  
Off, On  
On, Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Tray Icon  
Hide Passwords On - SCU as well as EAP authentica-  
tion dialog boxes hide passwords, WEP  
keys and other sensitive information.  
Admin Password Password that must be specified when A string of up to 64  
Admin Login button is pressed. characters.  
SUMMIT  
C-12 Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: SCU For 802.11b/g Radio  
Global Tab  
Table C.2 Global Tab  
Global Setting  
Description  
Value  
Default  
Auth Timeout  
Specifies the number of seconds that  
the software will wait for an EAP  
authentication request to succeed or  
fail. If authentication credentials are  
specified in the active profile and the  
authentication times out, then associa-  
tion will fail. If authentication creden-  
tials are not specified in the active  
profile and the authentication times out,  
then the user will be re-prompted to  
enter authentication credentials.  
An integer from 3 to 60. 8  
Certs Path  
Directory where certificates for EAP  
authentication are stored.  
Valid directory path up Dependent  
to 64 characters. on device.  
Ping Payload  
Amount of data to be transmitted on a Bytes: 32, 64, 128, 256, 32  
ping.  
512, 1024  
Ping Timeout ms Amount of time in milliseconds that  
Integer from 0 to  
5000  
1000  
passes without a response before ping 30000.  
request is considered a failure.  
Ping Delay ms  
Amount of time in milliseconds  
between successive ping requests.  
Integer from 0 to  
7200000.  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
intensity 38  
keyboard 38  
A
AC adaptor  
safety instructions 220  
backup profile, creating (Total Recall) 125  
backup profile, restoring (Total Recall)  
129  
Bad Scan Beep 205  
bar code  
Accepted Start Char 183  
accessories  
carrying case 219  
CH1000 Non-powered Vehicle Cradle  
232  
CH1005A Powered Vehicle Cradle 236  
desktop docking station 222  
Ethernet cable 228  
appending to 172, 205  
displaying type of bar code 205  
parameters 162  
prefix character 170, 171  
stripping characters 170, 172  
suffix character 170, 172  
symbologies  
hand strap 211  
quad docking station 227  
Active Conn Tab 117  
ActiveSync  
Codabar 175, 188, 201  
Code 11 190  
Code 128 171, 199  
ASync profile 114  
Adaptive Windowing 198  
Addendum 187, 199, 200  
Addendum Add-on 2 187  
Addendum Add-on 5 187  
Aim Duration 165  
aiming dot, duration of 165  
ALT Key 36  
appearance (display colour scheme) 86  
appending to bar codes  
characters 172, 205  
App Launch Keys 82  
arrow keys  
Code 39 199  
Code 93 175, 188, 200  
Discrete 2 of 5 178, 191  
EAN 13 171, 185, 199  
EAN 8 172, 185, 200  
Interleaved 2 of 5 177, 190, 201  
Matrix 2 of 5 191  
MSI Plessey 176, 189  
UPC A 172, 186, 200  
UPC E 173, 186, 200  
Translation tab 206  
Bar code decoding 145, 149  
Camera preset configuration 145–149,  
149–154  
moving the cursor 35  
ASCII  
Full Ascii 182  
Creating camera custom preset 147,  
151  
audio indicators  
beep conditions 41  
Default camera preset 146, 150  
Modifying camera custom preset 148,  
152  
Removing camera custom preset 149,  
153  
audio port pinout A-2  
Authentication, Bluetooth Controls 114  
Auto Exposure (Imager) 197  
Aztec, 2D 202  
Viewing camera custom preset 146,  
151  
bar code reader  
B
backlight  
display 84  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
Index  
integrated scanner, operation of 242  
Barcodes Must Decode 196  
batteries  
a description of 219  
contact pinout A-3  
battery  
Call Lists 22  
Call Management 23  
Captures Per HW Trigger 197  
case, carrying 219  
Center Bar Code Only (Imager) 195  
certificates, security 110  
CH, Bluetooth Controls 114  
changing password (Start Menu security)  
61  
Advanced dialog box 103  
capacity dialog box 100  
charging 32  
charging with desktop docking station  
223  
characters  
appending to bar codes 172  
charging with quad docking station 228  
Devices dialog box 104  
estimated battery backup time 102  
gauge 42  
GPS dialog box 104  
installing 11, 31  
power saving suspend dialog box 101  
removing 31  
run time 43  
specifications 258  
storing 44  
Suspend Threshold dialog box 102  
swap time 31  
WWAN power mode 104  
prefix 170, 171  
stripping 170, 172  
suffix 170, 172  
charger  
safety instructions 220  
chargers 219  
CH4000 desktop docking station 222,  
227  
CH4000 indicators 223  
CH4000 operation 223  
CH4000 operator controls 223  
CH4004 indicators 227  
CH4004 operator controls 227  
installing at a site 221  
Check Digit Algorithm (MSI Plessey)  
177  
Check Digits (MSI Plessey) 176  
Check Digit Verification 169, 183, 185,  
189, 190, 192  
Check Digit Verification (Codabar) 188  
Check Digit Verification (I 2 of 5) 177  
CH1001 Non-powered Vehicle Cradle  
232–235  
CH1005A Powered 236–242  
CH4000 desktop docking station 222  
cleaning 225  
troubleshooting 226  
CH4004 quad docking station 227  
cleaning 229  
battery charger  
safety instructions 220  
beeper  
beep conditions 41  
Bi-Direction Redundancy 166  
BKSP (DEL Key) 36  
Bluetooth devices, pairing 45, 112  
Bluetooth radio  
changing device name 118  
device service profiles 114  
headset 115  
ISM band 111  
PINs for devices 115  
radio configuration 111  
specifications 258  
Bluetooth setup 111  
GPRS setup 119  
peripherals 245  
Bright For (backlight) 85  
BSP, Bluetooth Controls 118  
Ethernet 228  
troubleshooting 230  
cleaning hand-held 47  
Click Data (scanner double-click) 205  
Click Time (scanner double-click) 204  
CLSI Editing 176  
CLSI Library System 188  
Codabar 188, 201  
C
cable diagrams A-1  
calibrating (touchscreen) 38, 105  
Codabar 175  
II  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Codablock 194  
Code 11 190  
Viewing 146, 151  
cycle tasks 64  
Code 128 199  
Code 128 171, 183  
Code 128 Emulation 180, 193  
Code 32, Convert To 168  
Code 32 Prefix 168  
Code 39 168, 182  
D
Data Matrix, 2D 202  
data transfer, PC to Ikôn 19  
DC IN port pinout A-3  
decoded (internal) scanner parameters 164  
decoded (ISCP) parameters 181  
Decode Performance 170, 171  
Decode Performance Level 170, 171  
Decoder Timeout 198  
Default  
Predefined preset 141  
DEL (BKSP) Key 36  
Delete Char Set ECIs 168  
Demo  
Code 93 175, 188, 200  
Code 93 175  
cold reset 27  
Cold Reset (Shutdown menu) 67  
COM, Bluetooth Controls 118  
Command Prompt 62  
communication  
Ethernet connection (quad docking  
station) 228  
Ikôn to PC 225  
Scanner 62  
Signature 62  
Sound 62  
Composite 179, 201  
conference calls, creating 24  
Configuration  
desktop connection, remote 77  
desktop docking station (CH4000) 222  
Device Name, changing 118  
dialer (phone), using 20  
Dialer (phone) icon 43  
dialing, phone number 20, 21  
dialog box, using 67  
Diff Read Timeout 182  
digital camera  
Bar code decoding camera preset 145,  
149  
Image capture presets 140  
connection list table, Bluetooth Controls  
117  
Constant Illumination 198  
Continuous Scan Mode 165, 181, 195  
Control Panel  
specifications 252  
App Launch Keys icon 82  
Dim For (backlight) 85  
Discrete 2 of 5 178, 191  
Discrete 2 of 5 178  
dismounting partitions 137  
display  
control panel  
accessing 77  
basic setup 82  
Display Properties 84  
icons 78  
keyboard properties 86  
power management properties 100  
stylus properties 105  
Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A 173  
Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A 174  
Convert To Code 32 168  
Convert To EAN 13 178, 186  
Convert To UPC -A 187  
CTRL Key 36  
appearance (colour scheme) 86  
backlight 84  
backlight, adjusting 38  
Display Properties 84  
Display Properties 84  
docking device icons 43  
docking port pinout A-1  
docking station  
CH4000, desktop  
Custom preset 143  
indicators 223  
operation 223  
Changing 143  
Creating 142, 147, 151  
Modifying 148, 152  
Removing 144, 149, 153  
operator controls 223  
CH4004, quad  
indicators 227  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
III  
Index  
operator controls 227  
uploading data using 45  
docking stations 219  
desktop docking station 222  
installation at site 221  
quad docking station 227  
Dot Time 165, 196  
double-click  
Function keys 36  
G
Good Scan Beep 205  
GPRS (Bluetooth) 119  
GPS radio 104  
GSM/GPRS B-3–B-19  
GSM radio 254  
appending characters to a decoded  
bar code 205  
scanner trigger 204  
GS1-128 183  
GS1-128 GS1 US 171  
GS1-128 Identifier 184  
GTIN Compliant 184, 187  
Double-Click, Manage Triggers menu 107  
Double-Tap (stylus settings) 105  
DUN service, Bluetooth 114  
H
hand strap 211  
E
handstrap (CH6021), attaching 211  
headset, Bluetooth 115  
headsets, pairing (Bluetooth) 45, 112  
EAN 13 171, 185, 199  
EAN 8 172, 185, 200  
EAN-8 Zero Extend 172  
ECI Decoder 168  
I
Enable Bookland (UPC-EAN) 174  
Enable CC-AB 179  
Enable CC-C 179  
Image capture  
Creating custom preset 142  
Default preset 141  
Modifyng custom preset 143  
Predefined presets 141  
Preset configuration 140–145  
Presets 140  
Enable Plessy 189  
Enable RSS Expanded 179, 193  
Enable RSS Limited 179, 193  
Enable RSS-14 178, 193  
Enable TLC-39 179  
Encryption, Bluetooth Controls 114  
Error Handler (Psion Teklogix) 134  
Error Reporting 133  
ESC Key 36  
Ethernet, connecting with docking station  
228  
Removing custom preset 144  
Viewing custom preset 142  
Imager  
EV15 specifications 260  
SX5400 specifications 262  
imager (2D) scanner  
scanning  
2D 244  
EV15 1D imager scanner specifications  
260  
imager options 242  
imager parameters 195  
indicators  
F
battery gauge 42  
dialer, phone 43  
docking devices 43  
LED functions 40  
modifier keys 42  
onscreen 41  
Factory Defaults On Reboot 196  
Fast Converge (Imager) 197  
Field Size 170  
Field Size/Chars (bar code scanning)  
170  
FNC1 Conversion 184  
formatting  
phone dialer 43  
scanner message 244, 245  
security level 43  
taskbar 55  
entire memory card 135  
partitions 137  
Full Ascii 182  
Full ASCII (decoded scanner) 169  
Wireless WAN 43  
IV  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
802.11radio signal quality 43  
Input Panel (control panel) 79  
integrated scanner option 242  
Intensity, Keyboard Backlight 89  
Intensity (backlight) 85  
Interleaved 2 of 5 177, 190, 201  
Internet Explorer 62  
Linear Decode 174  
Linear Security Level 166  
locking  
keyboard 34  
touchscreen 34  
Lock Sequence 97  
Low Power Timeout 165, 182  
L1, Set Length 169  
L2, Set Length 169  
IP address, assigning (Summit) 14  
ISBN Conversion 185  
ISBT Concat Any Pair 184  
ISBT Concat Transmit 184  
ISBT 128 171, 184  
M
Macro keys 36  
executing a macro 92  
Macros menu, accessing 91  
recording and saving 91  
maintenance (of hand-held) 47  
Manage Triggers 106  
Matrix 2 of 5 191  
Max Gain (Imager) 198  
Max Illumination (Imager) 198  
Max Integration (Imager) 198  
Max Number Barcodes 195  
memory card  
ISM band, Bluetooth radio 111  
K
keyboard  
backlight 38  
key repeat 86, 89  
one shot mode 90  
keyboard, locking 34  
keyboard keys 33  
ALT 36  
arrow keys 35  
BKSP 36  
CTRL 36  
DEL 36  
ESC 36  
creating partitions 136  
formatting entire 135  
formatting partition 137  
messages  
Macro keys 36  
macro keys 91  
modifiers 34  
navigating using the keyboard 51  
one shot mode 90  
SCAN 36  
sequence 88  
SHIFT 35  
SPACE 35  
TAB 36  
Scan Indicator 205  
scanner warning message 205  
Scan Result 205  
Micro PDF-417 180, 193, 202  
microSD, inserting 46  
Microsoft® ActiveSync® 19  
Minimum Cancel Time 165, 181  
Minimum Length 183, 185, 188, 189,  
190, 191, 192  
Min Scan Duration 197  
modem using VPN clients B-9  
modifier keys 34  
Keyboard Properties 86, 89  
backlight 89  
one shot mode 90  
Key Repeat tab 87  
locking 35  
One Shot Mode 90  
unlocking 35  
Modifying 143  
mounting partitions 138  
MSI Plessey 176, 189  
L
LANAccessUsingPPP service, Bluetooth  
114  
Laser On Time 165, 181  
LED  
N
functions 40  
name servers, assigning (Summit) 16  
NOTIS Editing 176  
Length Mode 189, 191, 192  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
V
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
NQuerty Retry, Bluetooth Controls 118  
Prefix 167  
Prefix Char 170, 171  
Preset  
O
one dimensional internal scanner 244  
One Shot Mode 90  
Configuration 145, 149  
Default 146, 150  
Image capture 140  
ON For 89  
Viewing 142  
P
Printer (serial service), Bluetooth 114  
profile, creating backup 125  
profile, restoring backup 129  
Programs  
Command Prompt 62  
Internet Explorer 62  
Remote Desktop Connection 62  
Windows Explorer 62  
protective case 219  
punctuation marks, accessing (SHIFT  
Key) 35  
pairing Bluetooth devices 45, 112  
Parameter Scanning 166, 182, 183, 184,  
185, 187, 188, 189, 190, 191, 192  
partitions  
creating 136  
deleting 137  
dismounting 137  
formatting 137  
management 137  
mounting 138  
PC, connecting Ikôn to 225  
PDF-417 179, 193, 201  
phone, dialing 20  
Phonebook 24  
Phone Dialer icon 43  
phone number, dialing 20, 21  
PIN, Bluetooth Controls 114  
pinouts A-1  
PINs, Bluetooth devices 115  
Plessy Transmit Check Digit 189  
port pinouts A-1  
Port Prefix, Bluetooth Controls 118  
ports  
Q
quad docking station (CH4004) 227  
R
radio  
Bluetooth 111  
Bluetooth specifications 258  
GSM/GPRS/EDGE 254  
IP address (Summit), assigning 14  
name servers (Summit) 16  
Siemens HC25 UMTS radio  
specifications 255  
Siemens MC75 GSM radio  
specifications 254  
specifications 253  
audio A-2  
DC IN A-3  
docking A-1  
UMTS 255  
Postal  
802.11signal quality 43  
radio specifications 253  
Raster Expand Rate (2D) 167  
Raster Height (2D) 167  
Reading Range 182, 184, 187, 190  
recalibrating (touchscreen) 38, 105  
remote connect 77  
PlaNET 203  
PostNET 203  
Royal 204  
Power button 11  
powering up 11  
Power Management Properties 100  
Advanced 103  
Remote Desktop Connection 62  
Repeat Delay (between key repeats) 87  
Repeat Rate (of key repeats) 88  
Repeat tab (key repeat settings) 87  
resetting the Ikôn  
battery capacity 100  
Devices 104  
GPS 104  
suspend, power saving 101  
Suspend Threshold 102  
WWAN power mode 104  
Power Source 101  
cold reset 27  
warm reset 27  
VI  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
RSS Code 178, 193, 201  
Run (Start Menu) 66  
Composite 179  
Continuous Scan Mod 165  
Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A 173  
Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A 174  
Convert To Code 32 168  
Convert To EAN 13 178  
Decode Perf. Level 170, 171  
Decode Performance 170, 171  
Delete Char Set ECIs 168  
Discrete 2 of 5 178  
Dot Time 165  
S
safety instructions  
AC adaptor 220  
battery charger 220  
scanner 242  
safety warning, scanner 242  
Same Read Timeout 182  
Same Read Validate 182  
Scan Data Format 167  
Scan Indicator 205  
SCAN Key 36  
double-click 204  
EAN-8 Zero Extend 172  
ECI Decoder 168  
Enable Bookland 174  
Enable CC-AB 179  
Enable CC-C 179  
Enable RSS Expanded 179  
Enable RSS Limited 179  
Enable RSS-14 178  
Enable TLC-39 179  
Full ASCII 169  
Scan Log File 206  
scanner  
decoded (internal) 164  
decoded (ISCP) 181  
imager 195  
module (SE955) specifications 259  
one dimensional (1D) internal scanner  
244  
Good Scan Beep 205  
laser duration 165  
options 242  
safety warnings 242  
techniques (scanning) 243  
troubleshooting tips 243  
two dimensional (2D) imager scanner  
244  
Laser On Time 165, 181  
Linear Decode 174  
Linear Security Level 166  
Low Power Timeout 165  
Micro PDF-417 180  
Minimum Cancel Time 165  
NOTIS Editing 176  
Parameter Scanning 166  
PDF-417 179  
scanning  
Aim Duration 165  
aiming (target) dot duration 165  
aiming pattern duration 165  
appending characters 172, 205  
Bad Scan Beep 205  
Bi-Direction Redundancy 166  
CheckDigitAlgorithm (MSIPlessey)  
177  
Check Digits (MSI Plessey) 176  
Check Digit Verification 169  
Check Digit Verification (I 2 of 5) 177  
Click Data (appending data) 205  
Click Time 204  
CLSI Editing 176  
Codabar 175  
Code 128 171, 183  
Code 128 Emulation 180  
Code 32 Prefix 168  
Code 39 168, 182  
Postal  
PlaNET 203  
PostNET 203  
Royal 204  
Prefix 167  
prefix character 170, 171  
removing characters 170, 172  
RSS Code 178  
safety instructions 242  
Scan Data Format 167  
Scan Indicator 205  
Scan Log File 206  
Scan Result 205  
Scan Result Time 205  
Security Level 174  
Set Length L1 169  
Set Length L2 169  
Code 93 175  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
VII  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Suffix 167  
changing password 61  
configuring taskbar 61  
level 60  
suffix character 170, 172  
Supp. Redundancy 174  
Supplementals 174  
Supervisor 60  
symbologies 162  
target (aiming) dot duration 165  
Translations tab 206  
Teklogix 60  
User 60  
sequence, keyboard 88  
Servers, Bluetooth Controls 116  
Services 23  
Services, Bluetooth Controls 114  
Set Length L1 169  
Set Length L2 169  
Set PIN, Bluetooth Controls 115  
Settings  
Transmit Check Digit 169  
Transmit Check Digit (I 2 of 5) 178  
Transmit Check Digit (MSI Plessey)  
177  
Transmit Code 1D Char 167  
Trioptic Code 39, Enable 168  
UPC-A Check Digit 172  
UPC-A Preamble 172  
UPC-EANI 174  
UPC-EAN Shared Settings 187  
UPC-E Check Digit 173  
UPC-E Preamble 173  
UPC-E1 Check Digit 173  
UPC-E1 Preamble 173  
1D internal 244  
Control Panel 65  
Network and Dial-up connections 65  
Run 65  
Taskbar and Start Menu 65  
SE955 scanner specifications 259  
SHIFT Key 35  
Shutdown  
Cold Reset 67  
Suspend 67  
Warm Reset 67  
2D Maxicode 202  
2D QR Code 202  
2D UPC Half Block Stitching 175  
Scanning Mode (2D) 167  
Scan Result 205  
Scan Result Time 205  
screen  
stylus, using to navigate 51  
touch pen, using 51  
Windows CE, navigating 51  
SCU (Summit Client Utility) 14, C-1  
configuring 17  
Shutdown (Start Menu) 66  
Siemens HC25 UMTS radio specifications  
255  
Siemens MC75 GSM radio specifications  
254  
signal quality, 802.11 43  
SIM card, inserting 46  
SIP (Soft Input Panel 79  
Soft Input Panel (SIP) 79  
Soft Scan Timeout 205  
SPACE Key 35  
Diags (Diagnostics) Tab C-9  
EAP Credentials C-7  
EAP Types C-6, C-7  
Global Tab C-10  
IP, assigning 14  
Main Tab 17, C-3  
Profile Tab C-4  
security C-6  
Status tab C-9  
specifications  
digital camera 252  
EV15 1D imager 260  
SE955 scanner 259  
Siemens HC25 UMTS radio 255  
Siemens MC75 GSM radio 254  
SX5400 imager 262  
802.11b/g WLAN radio 253  
Start/Stop Transmit 183, 188  
Start Menu 58  
ThirdPartyConfig C-8  
Windows Zero Config (WZC) C-8  
WLAN, connecting to 14  
security certificates 110  
Security Level 174  
security level icon 43  
Security Settings 60  
cycle tasks 64  
desktop 59  
programs 62  
Run 66  
VIII  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Security 60  
Settings 65  
Shutdown 66  
backup profile, creating 125  
backup profile, restoring 129  
touch pen, using 51  
system tray 63  
task manager 64  
touchscreen  
locking 34  
Strip Leading 170, 172  
Strip Trailing 170, 172  
stylus (touch pen), using 51  
Stylus Properties 105  
Double-tap (stylus sensitivity) 105  
stylus tether, attaching 214  
stylus tether (CH6020), attaching 216  
Suffix 167  
recalibration 38, 105  
stylus, using 51  
touch pen, using 51  
Translations parameters (bar codes) 206  
Transmit Check Digit 183, 185, 186, 188,  
189, 190, 191, 192  
Transmit Check Digit (I 2 of 5) 178  
Transmit Check Digit (MSI Plessey) 177  
Transmit Code 1D Char 167  
Transmit Number System 186  
trigger mappings 107  
Trigger-Press Type, Manage Triggers  
menu 109  
triggers, configuring 106  
Trioptic Code 39, Enable 168  
troubleshooting tips (scanning) 243  
TweakIT 129  
Suffix Char 170, 172  
Summit Client Utility (SCU) 14, C-1  
Supervisor security level 60  
Supp. Redundancy (Code 128) 174  
Supplementals (UPC-EAN) 174  
Suspend (Shutdown menu) 67  
Suspend Timeout 101  
swap time (for battery) 31  
SX5400 imager specifications 262  
symbologies, bar code 162  
system tray 63  
U
UMTS radio 255  
T
UPC A 172, 186, 200  
UPC-A Check Digit 172  
UPC-A Preamble 172  
UPC E 173, 186, 200  
UPC-EAN 174  
UPC-EAN Shared Settings 187  
UPC-E Check Digit 173  
UPC-E Preamble 173  
UPC-E1 Check Digit 173  
UPC-E1 Preamble 173  
UPC Half Block Stitching, 2D 175  
User security level 60  
Use Virtual Serial Port B-9  
TAB Key 36  
target dot, duration of 165  
taskbar  
customizing 56  
onscreen indicators  
battery gauge 42  
dialer, phone 43  
docking devices 43  
modifier keys 42  
phone dialer 43  
security level 43  
Wireless WAN 43  
802.11 radio signal quality 43  
using 55  
V
vehicle cradle  
task manager 64  
CH1000 Non-powered 232  
CH1005A powered 236  
powered, installing cables 239  
Voice  
Teklogix Error Handling Service 134  
Teklogix Imagers 140  
Teklogix security level 60  
TekTerm application 77  
Telepen 192  
tether for stylus 214  
tether for stylus (CH6020) 216  
Total Recall  
Call Lists 22  
Call Management 23  
conference calls 24  
dialing a number 21  
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IX  
Index  
Phonebook 24  
phone dialer 20  
Services 23  
Voice (phone options) 20  
Voice options  
dialing a number 20  
W
warm reset 27  
Warm Reset (Shutdown menu) 67  
warnings 205  
Window Height 196  
Windows® Start Menu See Start Menu 58  
Windows CE  
dialog box 67  
files, folders, & programs, working  
with 53  
Windows CE, navigating in 51  
Windows Explorer 62  
Windows Vista® 19  
Windows Zero Config (WZC) C-8  
Window Width 196  
Wireless WAN B-3–B-19  
Use Virtual Serial Port B-9  
Voice 18  
Wireless WAN icon 43  
WWAN power mode 104  
WZC (Windows Zero Config) C-8  
1D internal scanner 244  
2DAztec 202  
2D Data Matrix 202  
2D imager scanner 244  
2D Maxicode 202  
2D QR Code 202  
2D Raster Expand Rate 167  
2D UPC Half Block Stitching 175  
36-key keyboard  
uppercase letters, creating 37  
802.11b/g radio specifications 253  
X
Ikôn Rugged PDA (Windows CE 5.0) User Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Philips Food Warmer SCF616 05 User Manual
Philips Portable Radio AE6780 01 User Manual
Philips Stereo System 8FF3FPB User Manual
Pioneer Car Stereo System DEH 4400HD User Manual
Pioneer Mixer DJ Mixer User Manual
Pioneer Universal Remote BR 95 A User Manual
Planar Computer Monitor GX2MP User Manual
Planet Technology Switch WSD 800 User Manual
Polycom Conference Phone IP 600 SIP User Manual
Poulan Snow Blower 408373 User Manual